Upload
others
View
2
Download
0
Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises by Andy Smith
© Copyright 2010 Andy Smith
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 2 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Contents INTRODUCTION................................................................................10
How To Use This Book......................................................................11
Who Is This Book For? ......................................................................12
What’s Not In The Book....................................................................17
Designing Your Content Delivery..................................................19
How To Frame NLP Exercises..........................................................22
Exercise Pairs Or Triads? .................................................................24
How To Set Up The Room................................................................28
Choosing And Briefing Your Assistants ......................................30
Terms and Conditions For Your Course?....................................34
EXERCISES ........................................................................................38
BEGINNINGS AND WARM-UPS ......................................................................39
Mutual Introductions........................................................................40
Recrossing Arms ................................................................................41
Looking Down/Looking Up .............................................................43
Pointing Exercise................................................................................45
Peripheral Vision................................................................................49
Quick Peripheral Vision....................................................................54
Problems/Resources Exercise.........................................................57
Clarifying Outcomes for Training .................................................59
"Bushy Brain" Exercise ......................................................................60
Present State to Desired State ........................................................62
NLP in a Nutshell................................................................................65
MAPS OF THE WORLD ..................................................................................66
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 3 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Drawing From Words Alone............................................................67
Drawing My Living Room.................................................................69
"The Elephant In The Room"...........................................................71
Ambiguous Words .............................................................................73
PHYSIOLOGY AND EMBODIED EXERCISES......................................................75
Centering To Reduce Internal Dialogue.......................................76
Centering With Memory of Challenging Situation.....................80
“Weak Arm/Strong Arm" Exercise.................................................82
Group Weak Arm/Strong Arm Exercise .......................................84
The "Walk of Grace and Power"......................................................86
SENSORY ACUITY, CALIBRATION AND RAPPORT .........................................89
Visual Acuity Exercise.......................................................................90
Auditory Acuity: Like/Don’t Like Exercise ..................................92
Auditory Acuity: Clapping Exercise ..............................................94
Kinaesthetic Acuity: Like/Don't Like Exercise............................96
Calibrating States...............................................................................99
Finding The Boundaries Of Personal Space .............................102
Lie Detection Exercise.................................................................... 104
Tracking Two Minds Exercise ......................................................107
"Sticky Fingers" Exercise ...............................................................110
Listening/Not Listening................................................................. 113
Quick Listening/Not Listening ....................................................115
Matching/Mismatching.................................................................. 117
Voice Matching ................................................................................119
Pacing and Leading Exercise ........................................................121
I/You/We Exercise .......................................................................... 123
LANGUAGE EXERCISES...............................................................................126
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 4 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
"Don't Think Of A..."....................................................................... 127
This/That ..........................................................................................129
Meta Model Exercise....................................................................... 132
One-Word Reframing ..................................................................... 134
One-Word Reframing on the fly..................................................137
Reframing Exercise......................................................................... 139
Agreement Frame Exercise...........................................................141
Generating Metaphors ................................................................... 144
REP SYSTEMS AND EYE ACCESSING CUES..................................................146
Rep Systems: Generating Predicates.......................................... 147
Rep Systems Preference Test.......................................................149
Rep System Translation Exercise................................................154
Representational System Exercise 1........................................... 157
Representational System Exercise 2........................................... 160
Rep System Storytelling Exercise................................................162
Overlapping Rep Systems.............................................................164
Generating Rep System Questions .............................................167
Eliciting Eye Accessing Cues........................................................169
Emotional Awareness With Eye Accessing Cues.....................172
Preferred Sensory System for Love ............................................174
SUBMODALITY EXERCISES ......................................................................... 176
Bad Experience / Good Experience Exercise............................177
Compulsion to Indifference Exercise......................................... 181
Submodality Belief Change...........................................................183
Unconfident/Confident State Differences................................186
Dealing With A Critical Inner Voice ........................................... 188
Amplifying Motivation................................................................... 190
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 5 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Swish Pattern ...................................................................................193
Re-Contextualising Bad Experiences.......................................... 195
The Confidence Chorus ...............................................................198
New Behaviour Generator.............................................................200
ANCHORING AND ELICITING STATES ........................................................203
State Elicitation Exercise ...............................................................204
Self-Anchoring .................................................................................206
Circle of Excellence......................................................................... 210
Collapsing a Negative Anchor......................................................213
New Orleans Flexibility Drill ........................................................215
Walking The Energy Scale .............................................................217
Alphabet Editing..............................................................................219
Peripheral Vision Desensitisation...............................................223
TIME ......................................................................................................... 225
Back And Forward In Time...........................................................226
Elicit the Time Line......................................................................... 228
Test-Drive The Time Line..............................................................230
Trying On A Different Timeline ..................................................233
Verb Tenses......................................................................................237
VALUES AND GOAL SETTING .................................................................... 240
Eliciting Values ................................................................................241
Prioritising Values .......................................................................... 243
Checking for Values Conflicts.....................................................245
Eliciting Motivation Direction......................................................247
Defining Goals in Positive Language.......................................... 249
P.O.W.E.R. Goal-Setting .................................................................. 250
The ‘Compass’ Well-Formed Outcome Process.......................252
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 6 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Reasons vs Excuses Exercise........................................................256
Goal Installation Exercise .............................................................258
EMOTIONS AND RELATIONSHIPS ...............................................................259
Recognising Emotion - Left and Right Brains..........................260
Making Finer Distinctions In Emotions..................................... 262
Understanding Your Own Emotions .......................................... 264
Learning From "Difficult" People ................................................266
Meta-Mirror Exercise ...................................................................... 268
Quick 'Eyes Of Love' Exercise ......................................................270
Accessing Heart Intelligence........................................................273
Problem-Solving With Heart And Gut........................................ 274
EXPLORATION...........................................................................................276
Exploring NLP Presuppositions ...................................................277
Exploring Frames ............................................................................279
Neuro-Logical Levels Review........................................................281
Neuro-Logical Levels Compliments............................................283
Coaching With Neuro-Logical Levels.......................................... 285
Neuro-Logical Levels of Teams....................................................287
Whose Meta Program Is It Anyway?........................................... 289
Meta Program Influencing Language ......................................... 291
S.C.O.R.E. Process............................................................................292
Satir Categories Exercise...............................................................294
Time and Perceptual Positions Exercise ................................... 297
STRATEGIES AND MODELLING................................................................... 299
"Teach Me How To Do It" ..............................................................300
Eliciting Relaxation Strategy ........................................................302
"Disney Strategy" For Creativity..................................................304
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 7 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Walking In Another's Shoes .........................................................306
Walking In Another's Shoes (with coach) ................................. 308
Deep Physical Rapport................................................................... 310
"Speed Modelling" 1........................................................................ 313
"Speed Modelling" 2........................................................................ 315
Modelling The Timeline................................................................. 317
Who Are You When You're At Your Best? ................................319
Modelling Your Future Self...........................................................321
PRESENTATION SKILLS ..............................................................................323
Outcome Focus................................................................................324
Qualities of a Compelling and Credible Presenter.................327
Energy Bubble 1...............................................................................330
Energy Bubble 2...............................................................................332
Awareness Of The Group..............................................................334
Rapport With The Group...............................................................336
HYPNOSIS AND MILTON MODEL ...............................................................338
Uptime and downtime ................................................................... 339
Simple Self-Hypnosis Using Breathing ...................................... 341
"That's Right" ...................................................................................346
Pacing Current Experience............................................................348
Generate Embedded Suggestion Settings ................................. 350
Embedded Suggestion Practice....................................................352
HANDOUTS ....................................................................................355
WHAT IS NLP?.........................................................................................356
THE THREE PILLARS OF NLP .................................................................... 357
14 PRESUPPOSITIONS OF NLP.................................................................. 358
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 8 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
PRESENT STATE AND DESIRED STATE.......................................................359
THE MAP IS NOT THE TERRITORY ...........................................................360
SENSORY ACUITY - (V.I.B.E.S.)...............................................................361
RAPPORT .................................................................................................. 362
How Do We Establish Rapport?...................................................363
How Do You Recognise Rapport? ...............................................364
Is Pacing And Leading Manipulative? ........................................ 364
Practising Rapport .......................................................................... 365
PERIPHERAL VISION ANNOTATED SCRIPT .................................................366
PERIPHERAL VISION DESENSITISATION......................................................370
THE HIERARCHY OF IDEAS........................................................................ 371
REPRESENTATIONAL SYSTEMS................................................................... 372
SENSORY-SPECIFIC PHRASES ..................................................................... 373
REP SYSTEMS PREFERENCE TEST ...............................................................374
SCORING YOUR REP SYSTEM PREFERENCES...............................................375
SUBMODALITIES ........................................................................................376
BASIC SUBMODALITIES CHANGE - “MAPPING ACROSS” ............................377
SUBMODALITY BELIEF CHANGE PROCESS ..................................................378
Key Success Factors In Submodality Work:..............................379
META MODEL ...........................................................................................380
Considerations For Using The Meta Model ..............................381
ANCHORING .............................................................................................382
THE CIRCLE OF EXCELLENCE .................................................................... 383
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 9 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
FRAMES..................................................................................................... 384
THE AGREEMENT FRAME .......................................................................... 386
ONE-WORD REFRAMING (“EMOTIVE CONJUGATION”) ..............................387
CONSTRUCTING A METAPHOR .................................................................. 388
“NEURO-LOGICAL LEVELS OF CHANGE” ...................................................389
Neuro-Logical Levels Of Teams...................................................390
THE “DISNEY STRATEGY” FOR CREATIVITY .............................................391
THE S.C.O.R.E. MODEL........................................................................... 392
Sample questions to clarify each component..........................393
Using the S.C.O.R.E. in practice - with individuals .................394
Using the S.C.O.R.E. in practice - with teams...........................395
THE ‘SATIR CATEGORIES’ ......................................................................... 396
VALUES..................................................................................................... 398
POWERFUL GOALS ..................................................................................399
WALKING A GOAL INTO YOUR FUTURE TIMELINE.................................... 400
WALL CHARTS...............................................................................401
PRESENT STATE AND DESIRED STATE ......................................................402
THE MAP IS NOT THE TERRITORY ...........................................................403
ALPHABET EDIT ........................................................................................405
COMPASS FOR A WELL-FORMED OUTCOME...............................................406
INDEX OF APPLICATIONS........................................................................... 407
ABOUT THE AUTHOR....................................................................410
Products by Andy Smith ...............................................................411
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 10 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Introduction
This section explains who the book is for, how to use it, plus
some tips on course design and training room setup that you may
find useful. Feel free to skip it and just go straight to the exercise
that you want.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 11 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
How To Use This Book
Mostly, it’s obvious - just pick the exercises you want to use, print
out the handout (if applicable), and run with it.
However, there are a couple of slightly less obvious features. One
is the ‘Index of Applications’ near the end of the book. Use this if
you are running a workshop or training course on a specific
subject (like Sales, Stress Management, or Self-Esteem) and want
to find exercises you can incorporate.
Also, included with this beautifully designed e-book in PDF form
are the Word versions of the Handout pages and Wall Charts. I
have included these because you will almost certainly want to
tweak them to reflect the material you are teaching, or the
branding of your training organisation.
It’s quite possible that the pagination of the Word version will be
all over the place, because you may be using a different page size
(this was written in the UK so it uses A4). Also, your computer,
particularly if it runs Windows, will probably interpret fonts
slightly differently from my Mac. Fortunately, you have the PDF
version to show you how it should look
If you find any errors, typos or missed attributions in the text,
please let me know at [email protected]. I will send
the link for updated versions to all previous purchasers. And do
let me know if you want to license this book for your students.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 12 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Who Is This Book For?
1. You are an NLP trainer, newly qualified or experienced
When I qualified as an NLP trainer in 1997, I really could have
benefited from a resource like this, giving me access to a wealth
of training exercises.
Of course, if your certifying trainer supports their courses with
audio or video home study products to support their live training,
the easy route is to reproduce a carbon copy of that trainer’s
Practitioner course, using their audio products and licensing their
manual.
If you, like me, want to create something that is more your own,
that you can really believe in, there’s a lot more work involved -
writing or adapting your Practitioner manual, perhaps dropping
elements that are idiosyncratic to the person you trained with but
that don’t quite fit your map of the world, and above all
incorporating, adapting or designing from scratch exercises that
will enable your students to learn the essential elements of NLP
(plus any additional ones required by whichever certifying body
you are affiliated to).
I was lucky, because I also ran an NLP practice group with guest
presenters (the Richmond NLP Group that Nick Driscoll and I
started in 1996) which exposed me to scores of different NLP
trainers and Master Practitioners, each bringing their own
perspective.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 13 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
My trainers had always told me that “not all wisdom is found in
your school”, and time and again the truth of this was brought
home to me as I tried out an exercise that was new to me.
To use these exercises in my own courses, I still had to figure out
how they worked, remember the step-by-step instructions, and
often adapt them. I also had to reverse-engineer what the
objectives of the exercise were, based on what the trainer said
about it beforehand, what questions they asked afterwards in the
clear up, and the results I observed in myself and others.
Contact me if you would like to become an affiliate, or license
this resource to resell to your own students -
If you are a newly-qualified NLP trainer, this resource gives you a wealth of exercises, probably with some you have not come across before, and almost certainly some with different or additional ways of doing the exercise, learning points, or clear up questions that will enhance your training. You also get handouts for your students that you can adapt and wallcharts that you can easily translate into PowerPoint. If you are an experienced NLP trainer, by now you are probably looking to add some changes into your courses, particularly if you tend towards the ‘options’ rather ‘procedures’ end of the preference spectrum. I am still learning after 15 years in NLP, and I’m sure you are too. This is the resource I wish had been available when I started!
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 14 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
2. You organise or participate in an NLP Practice group
One of the most useful and cost-effective things you can do to
sharpen your NLP skills is to start an NLP practice group, or join
an existing one.
Often people want to keep the wonderful experience of their NLP
Practitioner course going, so they meet up informally every so
often and choose a pattern or two to practice. Where the learning
really goes up a gear is when your group has participants who
have trained with different schools, each bringing different
perspectives, understandings and applications of NLP, and
exercises that may be new to you.
Right after my practitioner training I was fortunate enough to
form a small practice group with two graduates of other NLP
institutes, which gave me the opportunity to try out exercises that
were new to me but which I’ve used with clients and in my own
NLP courses ever since.
It’s fun to try out new and different exercises. After Practitioner
level (an essential foundation to have some sort of understanding
of what you are doing), I believe you can learn as much from
practice with your peers as you can from additional NLP training
(although the learnings are of a different kind).
This resource gives you step-by-step instructions for scores of exercises, plus ready-made handouts, so you can prepare for a practice group and still have time to do your day job!
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 15 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
3. You are a professional trainer who wants to incorporate
some NLP into your offerings
You’re good at what you do. Maybe you’ve read some NLP books
and liked what’s in there, maybe you’ve taken an NLP course
recently and are fired up to sprinkle some of that rejuvenating
NLP fairy dust on your courses, or maybe it was a while ago, you
love NLP, but haven’t felt confident enough to use NLP exercises
in the training room?
This resource is designed to make it easy for you. The only other
NLP resources for trainers that I’m aware of are twice the price of
this one, and from what I’ve seen and heard are not as full of
useful content, and wrapped up in restrictions so that you are
pretty much stuck with their formats and branding.
I designed these resources to supply what you need as a trainer -
with objectives for each exercise, clear step-by-step instructions,
useful questions to ask after each exercise, and where necessary,
handouts and wall charts. Where applicable, I have also added
questions that you might expect from students, and suggestions
on what to reply to them, based on my 13 years of teaching NLP.
As a trainer myself, I know that you want something you can use
quickly, and adapt without hassle to the needs of your students
and the courses you run. With this in mind, the Handout pages
that come with this resource are clear and pleasantly formatted,
usually with some use of colour. In addition to the main PDF
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 16 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
document, you also get the Handouts and Wall Charts in
Microsoft Word format so that you can adapt them and rebrand
them as you wish.
You are free to do pretty much anything you want with these
exercises and handouts, short of pirating them as a product -
select the ones you want, adapt them to suit the needs of your
course participants, or incorporate the handouts into your course
materials.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 17 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
What’s Not In The Book
Which techniques and exercises you won’t find
There are some NLP exercises and techniques that I have
deliberately not included in this resource. In particular, I have left
out any “deep changework” techniques such as the Phobia Cure
and Parts Integration.
This is not because I have anything against these techniques or
that I don’t think they work; on the contrary, it’s because they are
so powerful that I believe you need to know them inside out
before you teach them or facilitate exercises involving them.
This has meant leaving out some of the highest-profile techniques
in NLP, but I believe it was the right thing to do. Here’s my
reasoning: the exercise for learning or practising one of these
techniques is basically to do the technique. These are readily
available in many NLP books, or even set out for free on the
internet. So if you’re interested in NLP, you probably know about
these techniques already.
More importantly, if you are expert in these techniques and you
can use them with the degree of competence and attention that
they demand to be used safely, you already know how to teach
them. And if you aren’t skilled in them already, and you don’t
have experience of the different things that can happen when you
use them for real with clients, you have no business trying to
teach them to others.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 18 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Similarly, there are some “exploratory” exercises that I have left
out, in particular those that involve messing around with your
reality strategy. Carelessly used, those might leave someone less
sure of what is real and what is not - which is not something I
want to encourage.
What you will find is lots of exercises to sharpen skills and
sensory acuity, lead to the discovery of finer distinctions, and
help you teach and learn the main points of NLP in an effective
and enjoyable way.
You also won’t find ‘NLP 101’ explanations
This book is not a primer, or a text that is supposed to help you
‘learn NLP from scratch’. It assumes that you, the reader, has
some familiarity with NLP and NLP terminology. So occasionally,
for ease and speed, I have used a commonly accepted NLP jargon
term.
I don’t expect that anyone who has read even a couple of
introductory NLP books will come across any unfamiliar terms. If
you do, Google is your friend! There are lots of NLP glossaries
online, my favourite being Andy Bradbury’s at
www.bradburyac.mistral.co.uk
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 19 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Designing Your Content Delivery
The method I use to design my courses is based on Bernice
McCarthy's '4-MAT' system, originally designed to appeal to all 4
'learning styles'. Although a recent study has pretty much
debunked the concept of learning styles, this format still works
on a practical level as it seems to suit the way the human mind
learns.
If you are an NLP trainer or even a Master Practitioner, you will
almost certainly have come across the 4-MAT system. But there
are some things you can do with headlining and review that you
may not have come across (they certainly weren’t emphasised on
the Trainer’s Training I did) so do take a minute to read on, and
maybe longer to think about how you will incorporate these ideas
in the way you train.
Each 'chunk' of content should be delivered with this format:
1. 'Frame' the content, identifying what it is, ideally with a
'headline' that will get people's attention e.g. 'If there was a
way that you could feel centred, resourceful and strong, no
matter how daunting the challenge that faces you - whether it’s
a looming deadline, a crucial presentation, or even a life-
threatening situation, would you want to know about it?'
The other bit of the frame is basically the old favourite 'tell
them what you are going to tell them' from traditional training
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 20 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
advice. As well as giving people a conceptual framework to fit
the information into, it stops them asking irrelevant and
distracting (to other learners) questions about Freud’s
conceptual framework or VAK notation while you are doing the
section on anchoring, or whatever. They will know not to
because you have already framed this bit of the course as
being about anchoring, and if necessary you can gently remind
them of this without them feeling affronted. NB the importance
of headlining was first brought home to me when I attended
my friend Jonathan Altfeld's “Linguistic Wizardry” course
(www.altfeld.com/mastery/).
2. 'Why?' - reasons why they should pay attention, for people who
refuse to learn unless you give them a reason why.
3. 'What?' - the actual information content. Just what people
need, and no more. This appeals to people who like learning
stuff for its own sake, but will bore anyone else if it goes on
too long.
4. 'How?' - the hands-on bit, appealing to practical learners. Give
them an exercise to do. If necessary, demo it beforehand.
5. 'What If?' - for speculative thinkers and people who want to
know exception conditions etc. They may be asking questions
all the way through - if they ask at the 'what' stage, for
example, I generally tell them to try the exercise out first and
ask again if it hasn't answered their question. This bit is where
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 21 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
you take questions. If you get into the exception conditions too
soon (e.g. in the content stage) it will get too complicated for
people to take in.
6. Review. This is the 'tell them what you've just told them' stage.
Also worth a v. quick review of what you've covered before
each break, before lunch, and at the end of the day. Studies
show that people remember material from the beginning and
the end more than material from the middle (the Serial
Position Effect).
For practical advice about the 4-MAT
system and how to use it, I recommend
the book 'Presenting Magically:
Transforming Your Stage Presence With
NLP' by David Shephard and Tad James.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 22 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
How To Frame NLP Exercises
This is what you don’t want: people regarding the exercises as a
competition, or as an assessment of how good at NLP they are,
and you definitely don’t want participant judging themselves on
how “well” they did the exercise.
We learn from our mistakes, but only if we can stay in a
resourceful enough state to be able to learn.
A useful frame to put around exercises right at the start of a
course, with the occasional reminder later, is the “Discovery
Frame.” This is an extension of the principle that “There is no
failure, only feedback”:
• Anything that happens in the course of an NLP exercise can
potentially give you valuable learnings
• If you get the result you expected, that’s useful information.
• If you don’t get the result you expected, that is also useful
information.
• A useful question is “What distinctions do you notice (in your
physiology, your feelings, your internal dialogue, or in external
circumstances) between the times when you get the results
you expect, and the times when the results turn out differently
than expected?”
• Whatever happens, be curious!
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 23 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
The Discovery Frame is only possible if people are authentically
themselves during the exercises. Some participants may have
been conditioned by “role-play” exercises that they have
encountered in corporate training to play the part of someone
other than themselves during any training exercise. This pretty
much guarantees that the exercise won’t work.
By and large, we don’t use role-play in NLP exercises, which will
come as a relief to many participants who understandably dread
it. As with any generalisation, there are always exceptions - in this
resource it’s the Satir Categories exercise.
For most NLP exercises, particularly those where any sort of
changework or coaching is involved, participants need to be fully
present as themselves. They also need to follow the instructions
for the exercise; if they don’t, they may learn something but it
won’t necessarily be what your exercises are carefully designed to
impart.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 24 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Exercise Pairs Or Triads?
I was surprised to hear that some large NLP Practitioner courses
don’t use the ‘triad’ structure, instead just doing all the exercises
in pairs. I believe that this short-changes the participants, because
they don’t get as much or as many kinds of feedback on what
they are doing, and they don’t get to observe exercises except as a
participant.
I use triads wherever I can. The triad setup enables participants to
experience a pattern from the multiple perspectives of
‘Practitioner, Client, Observer’ or ‘Guide, Explorer, Supporter’.
The addition of an Observer enables the participants to get
feedback on what happened in the exercise from a viewpoint
which can see the two of them as a system, giving an additional
perspective that neither of them can have as a participant. Plus,
being observed, the participants are more likely to stick to the
exercise as described.
It also gives the Observer valuable practice in delivering feedback
without mindreads or evaluation, simply describing what they
observed in the interaction.
Also, as a trainer you cannot be everywhere. If you are observing
and delivering feedback on one pair, you would necessarily have
to take your eyes off the others.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 25 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Plus, having a fellow participant observe the exercise is likely to
affect the process less than if you, the trainer, or one of your
assistants is doing the observing.
Of course there is a downside to including a third party as
observer, which is it makes each exercise take longer - probably
more than the 50% longer you might expect, too, because as well
as having their turn, the third party will be delivering feedback.
With a few exercises that are likely to take longer (such as
‘Coaching With Neuro-Logical Levels’) I tend to dispense with the
Observer role, both because the exercise would take a long time,
and because it’s asking a lot for the Observer to give their
sustained attention over the whole period of the exercise.
Otherwise, I recommend doing exercises as a triad rather then a
pair wherever you can.
How to arrange the chairs
This is going to seem ridiculously small-chunk to some readers,
but how you arrange the chairs for an exercise will make a
difference to how the exercise turns out.
For a pairs exercise, participants may be tempted to arrange the
chairs facing each other like this:
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 26 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
This is not ideal, for a number of reasons:
• facing someone straight-on like this suggests either
confrontation or that you are looking lovingly into their eyes
as a prelude to kissing them, neither of which is usually what
you are looking for in an NLP exercise.
• if you are front and centre in someone’s field of vision, it’s
harder for them to visualise - and you may become mixed up
with whatever they do manage to see in their mind’s eye.
• if you spend a long time sitting facing each other, in rapport,
you will both tend to lean forwards - which can put a real
strain on your back after an hour or so (thanks to London-
based NLP trainer Arielle Essex www.practicalmiracles.com for
this insight).
Much better to sit at an angle to them, like this:
This arrangement gives more of a feeling of facing or examining
something together, and provides a clear field for the Explorer to
project their ‘external representations’ onto. You will find it’s
much easier to work with someone in this way.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 27 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
In an exercise triad you would arrange the chairs like this (where
‘O’ is the observer’s chair:
Sometimes the non-verbal behaviour of the other two participants
may show that they are trying to include the Observer in their
conversation - if this happens, the Observer should be still,
refrain from responding, and possibly lean back or move the
chair back a little.
O
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 28 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
How To Set Up The Room
For teaching
If you wanted people to shut up and just listen to you, then a
‘theatre style’ arrangement with the chairs in flat rows would be
the setup of choice. Everyone is looking forward, so their
attention is naturally on you. As the focal point of the room, you
will have more status than everyone else, and people will look to
you for cues as to how to behave.
If, on the other hand, you wanted everyone to contribute, you
would have the chairs in a circle. That way, everyone is equal, and
everyone can see each other’s eyes so that it’s easy for them to
read the mood of the group. People in this setup are much more
likely to speak up, participate in discussions, and answer
questions.
For most NLP training you want people to listen to you when you
are delivering content, and contribute in the “What if?” segments
and post-exercise clear ups. The best arrangement to encourage
this with a small group is a shallow horseshoe shape, in which
people can see each other’s eyes to an extent but are still facing
forward and looking at you most of the time. This is the shape I
use to set up my courses. Tables in front of each chair would act
as an “energetic barrier” between me and the participants, so I
don’t use them.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 29 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
With a larger group you can have multiple rows of shallow
horseshoes, but inevitably those towards the back will feel more
cut off from you. The best setup for a larger group is probably
“cabaret style” with around 6 people per table. This makes group
collaboration easier, but do allow for extra space for all those
tables.
Some venues I’ve encountered don’t seem to know what “cabaret
style” is, so draw them a picture like this to make absolutely sure:
Front of
room
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 30 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Choosing And Briefing Your Assistants
Advice for newly-qualified NLP trainers
I know some NLP trainers don’t use assistants, but I find them
invaluable on a course of any length or depth, for the reasons set
out in my ‘Guidance for Assistants’ below.
Usually you will find assistants willing to work unpaid - it’s a win-
win for them, especially recent practitioner graduates, as they get
to observe the course material from a different perspective and
consolidate their learning.
When choosing your assistants, you are looking for friendly,
bright, emotionally stable people with good rapport skills and the
ability to meet other people at their maps of the world.
If you draw your assistants from graduates of your own courses,
you will know their skills and characters and be able to select the
right ones for the job. If you want to use assistants who have
done other trainers’ courses, make sure you get to know them
first.
Having assistants trained by others is great for them, as it
exposes them to different material or at least a different training
style to what they have experienced previously. It can also be
great for you. I have had many assistants who did their NLP
Practitioner training with others and went on to become students
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 31 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
on my Master Practitioner course, or who got me hired for
corporate work.
If you are a male trainer, it’s a good idea to have some female
assistants, and vice versa, to balance male and female energies in
the training room. Also some students may feel more comfortable
confiding in someone of the same sex.
Advice for trainers who lack confidence with NLP
All of the above is addressed to those who are already NLP
trainers or running NLP-based workshops. I also know that there
are many highly skilled professional trainers out there who have
taken NLP Practitioner or even Master Practitioner training but for
whatever reason don’t feel confident enough to incorporate NLP
into their training. You know who you are! The best advice I can
give you is - find a good NLP trainer running open courses and
volunteer to assist them! You will learn a huge amount from this
different perspective, possibly more than you did on your original
training.
Guidance for Assistants
This is the briefing I give my assistants. I am sure you will want to
reword it to reflect your own requirements:
The role of the assistant is fundamentally to make the experience
as good as possible for the participants.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 32 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
This means:
• Helping to set up the training room
• Participating in exercises if needed
• 'Rescuing' any participant who gets into emotional difficulties
so they don't disturb the other participants (this doesn’t
happen too often)
• Allowing the students to find their own way through the
exercises
• 'Holding the positive energy' in the training room
• Making the trainer look good! So no asking awkward
questions or distracting the students by talking during the
'lecture' parts of the course. Disagreeing with the trainer or
putting forward an alternative model will confuse the
students as the contradictory models will ‘blow each other
out’ and prevent the students from learning anything. (If you
have any questions about anything I tell the students, ask me
about it in the break!)
• Leaving space for the students to contribute their questions
and observations
Please arrive by <45 minutes before start time> on the first day to
help greet the students and set up the room. On subsequent days
it is VITAL that you arrive on time (before <start time>) -
otherwise you are sending a message to the students that it is OK
to arrive late.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 33 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
If you can't make it on any day that you said you would come,
phone me to let me know.
Thanks for agreeing to assist on this course. Good assistants are
vital to creating a good course, and are not easy to find. Together
we can make this course the best yet and create an environment
where each student can have a life-changing experience.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 34 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Terms and Conditions For Your Course?
I remember when I did my original NLP Practitioner training being
handed some terms and conditions to sign when I arrived in the
training room on the first day. I didn’t mind, because they weren’t
too onerous and I trusted the trainer.
On reflection, I now think that being handed conditions to sign
after you have handed your money over, after you have possibly
booked time off work, made extensive childcare arrangements,
and maybe flown in from another country to take a course is a
little late. I’m no lawyer, so I don’t know if any conditions handed
to you at that late stage would even stand up in law, as they are
an attempt to change the terms of a contract after its been sealed
by you handing the money over. So if you are going to have terms
and conditions for the courses you run, it seems only fair and
prudent that your participants should know about them up front.
So should you have conditions for your courses at all? I chose to,
and this is why. When I started running NLP Practitioner courses I
didn’t have any terms and conditions - people paid their money,
turned up, and did the course. The first course was fine. The
second course was fine. The third course was a nightmare, with
some students who I now believe had chosen to take NLP training
as a substitute for therapy acting out in various ways, harbouring
delusions about attractive assistants, and disturbing the other
students who were there to learn skills. If that had been my first
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 35 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
course, I would probably have resigned from my NLP training
career there and then.
This, I believe, is not an uncommon motive for taking NLP
courses. In his very entertaining book ‘Tricks of the Mind’ Derren
Brown describes some of his fellow participants on an unnamed
NLP course as ‘clearly either unbalanced or self-delusory’. I have
met people holding Master Practitioner certificates from
somewhere that I would think of in similar terms. Unless this is
the target market you are going for, you don’t want these people
on your course.
For the next course I introduced terms and conditions and
subsequent courses ran smoothly. I never needed to invoke the
conditions with anyone; just the fact that the conditions were
present on the booking form seemed to discourage emotionally
unstable people and those who were looking for therapy rather
than to develop themselves and learn skills.
So on the next page, as an example, are the terms and conditions
attached to my courses. Feel free to adapt and improve on them.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 36 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
NLP Practitioner Certification Training – Terms and Conditions
Please read carefully and print off a duplicate copy for your records.
1. Purpose of course The NLP Practitioner Course is not a substitute for psychotherapy. While you may achieve
major shifts and breakthroughs, the course is designed primarily to impart NLP skills to students
who are already in reasonable psychological health – students with diagnosed
psychological conditions or major unresolved issues may find the course too challenging.
Please notify us of any diagnosed psychological problems, unresolved issues or medication
that you are on before enrolling for the course so that we can determine whether this is the
right course for you.
2. Acceptance of your application Not everyone is ready for an NLP practitioner training – we want to make sure that our limited
number of places go to students who will value the skills they learn rather than those who are
just after another qualification. Enrolment on the course is at the discretion of Coaching
Leaders Ltd, based on the information given in your application and on our conversations
with you. This is to ensure that, in a small-group course, we can provide the best possible
learning environment.
3. Certification as an NLP Practitioner Participants are expected to commit themselves to attend the whole of the course.
Assessment is continuous through practical exercises and also by examination. Your
certification is conditional on achieving standards and attending the required number of 120
training hours.
4. Special requirements Please let us know of any special requirements (e.g. disabilities) which we need to know
about to enable us to provide you with the best possible experience.
5. Our guarantee If you decide at any point during the first module of the course that it's not for you, we will
refund your course fee (less £200 to cover materials and administration). If you have booked
both parts of the course and Coaching Leaders Ltd decide you are not ready for Part II, we
will refund your course fee less £360 + VAT (£423) to cover Part I.
6. Your commitment This course is not deliberately designed to trigger your emotional "stuff". Very occasionally a
participant may unexpectedly run into an emotional issue - especially in the early part of the
course before you learn how to clear emotional baggage. To be fair to yourself and the
other participants, we would ask you to make a commitment to yourself to take responsibility
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 37 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
for your own emotional state and to stick with the course even if you temporarily hit an
emotional 'blip'.
7. Desired Outcomes for the course
What are your goals for this course? What do you want to use your NLP
Practitioner skills/qualification for?
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
8. About you
Please include a page or so of background about yourself and
why you have chosen to apply for this course.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 38 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Exercises
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 39 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Beginnings and Warm-Ups
Beginnings have an important effect on group dynamics.
When I was starting out in NLP and personal development, I
attended many courses where the trainer just launched into the
material, or into hypnotic nested loops, without taking any time
to ensure that students felt part of the group. Consequently, I
wasn't in as good a learning state as I could have been.
Whenever I do a training of a day or more, I always take a little
time to make sure that students get to know at least one other
person. The 'Mutual Introductions' exercise is a good way to do
this, although some students will start getting twitchy if there are
more than about 12 introductions to sit through.
In larger groups you can get the students to do a similar exercise
in sub-groups of around 8, with results being shared by a
spokesperson or assistant.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 40 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Mutual Introductions
Timing: 5 minutes each way
Objectives:
• To make each student feel more included in the group
• To focus the student's mind on their desired outcome
• To let you know what they want and expect from their training
Ask the students to pair up with someone they don't know and
take about 5 minutes to find out who they are (not their whole
life story) and what they want to get from the course.
When they have gone both ways, ask each student to introduce
the person they have been working with and what they want from
the course. Write up each person's objectives – you can return to
them at the end of the module and at the end of the course to
ensure everyone's needs and expectations have been met.
Use this exercise for:
-Group dynamics, -Inclusion, -Introduction to NLP
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 41 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Recrossing Arms
Timing: 3 minutes
Objectives:
• Demonstrates the 'programming' bit of NLP in a non-
threatening way
• Helps to loosen up a skeptical audience, especially if they have
their arms folded
Procedure
Ask participants to fold their arms, folding your own arms at the
same time.
"Now notice that one hand is tucked under the other arm, while
the other hand rests on top of the opposite arm. (NB this should
be true of most participants). Now fold your arms.... the opposite
way."
Clear up
Point out that some people end up where they started. Some are
still trying to fold their arms the opposite way a minute or two
later. When you finally do manage to fold your arms the opposite
way, it feels really strange - because the chances are that every
time you've folded your arms previously in your entire life,
you've done it the same way, without thinking about it.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 42 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
This is a small and easily noticeable example of the habitual
patterns that our brains run again and again, the same way every
time - because it's easier. It takes less processing power that way.
And that's fine - until a pattern, repeated without even being
aware of it, doesn't serve you any more.
I wonder what other habitual patterns - or "programs" - you've
been running up to now, without noticing them?
Use this exercise for:
-Introduction to NLP, -Behaviour Change
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 43 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Looking Down/Looking Up
Timing: 5 minutes
Objectives:
• Participants experience that mind and body are one system
• Participants have a new way of cheering themselves up
Procedure
Ask participants to slump over and gaze at their feet (they could
be sitting or standing at this point).
Ask them to remember a time when they were really happy and
excited (use 'bored', low-energy tonality at this point).
After 30 seconds to a minute, ask them to stand up, make sure
they have enough room to throw their arms open wide, and look
up!
Now ask them to remember a time that was really quite boring
and tedious (your tonality should be somewhat higher energy and
'have a smile in it').
After a minute, bring them back.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 44 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
What to expect
Participants will have found it hard to fully recall a happy,
exciting time when bent over, and equally hard to recall a tedious
time while looking up with their arms spread wide.
Clear up
Why are you smiling? (most of them probably will be)
What happened as you tried to access the good time while you
were bent over?
What happened as you tried to access the tedious time when you
were looking up?
Use this exercise for:
-Introduction to NLP, -Behaviour Change, -Confidence, -Stress
Management, -Self-Esteem
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 45 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Pointing Exercise
Timing: about 5 minutes in total
Objectives
• To demonstrate that mind and body are one system
• To show the power of the unconscious mind
• To flush out any 'mismatchers' at an early stage
Have the group stand up and spread out. Get them to point
straight ahead with their right arms, and keeping their feet
where they are throughout the exercise, turn as far to the left as
they can comfortably go. Ask them to take a mental snapshot of
what they are pointing at. Then come back to facing forwards and
relax, still keeping their feet where they are.
Now say, "imagine what you would be looking at if you could
point about 6 inches (15 cm) further round and still be
comfortable. You would be looking at a point some way to the left
of what you were looking at previously – what would that look
like?
"Imagine saying to yourself, 'Wow – I can turn round quite a bit
further than I thought, and still be comfortable.'
“And what would it feel like to turn round that much further and
still be comfortable? Imagine how it would feel.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 46 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
"And what if you could turn round another foot (30cm) further
and still be comfortable? Imagine what you would be looking at
now. And imagine saying to yourself, 'This is amazing! I am much
more flexible than I thought!'
"And notice what it would feel like to be that much more flexible.
"What if you could turn round two feet further (60cm)? What
would you be looking at then? Take a moment to see it clearly.
"And you'd probably say to yourself, 'This is incredible! I can turn
all this extra way round and still be comfortable – I am amazingly
flexible!'
"And notice what it feels like to turn all that way round and still
feel comfortable."
Now ask them to point forwards again, and still keeping their feet
where they are, turn round to the left as far as they can
comfortably go and notice what they are pointing at now.
The class will be able to turn round much further. Ask them what
happened.
What If?
If someone says "I can't make it work" or "nothing happened", say:
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 47 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
"That's right, it didn’t'; because instead of exploring the images,
sounds and feelings of how it would be to turn round further, you
were talking to yourself inside about how it probably wouldn't
work – which I bet you do quite a bit and already are quite good
at. This is what the average person does and it's a great way for
them to keep themselves average and the same as everyone else.
To get a different result you would have to do something
different – which is to do the visual, auditory and kinaesthetic
steps I described."
This person may be a mismatcher (who sorts for differences, and
who habitually will do the opposite of everything they are asked
to do) or they may just be someone with a strong 'Self One' who
worries about getting things 'right' so much that it gets in the way
of other modes of processing.
If they are a mismatcher, keep an eye on them in future – you
may want to precede some future exercises with something like
"Now some of you won't be able to do this" to elicit a response of
"Oh really? Watch me do it perfectly!" in the mismatcher.
Explanation
When you were using visual, auditory and kinaesthetic senses to
imagine being able to turn round further, you were making vivid
communications to the unconscious mind, which controls the
body.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 48 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Your unconscious doesn't really distinguish between imagination
and 'reality', so when you were using those senses to imagine
turning round, you were 'programming' your unconscious mind
to start making what you imagined real at a physiological level.
Future Pace
If you can do this easily, what else could you ask your
unconscious mind to do for you? I wouldn't want to suggest that
you imagine having 20 or 30 years active vigorous life more than
you expected, or that your health and fitness will dramatically
improve, or that you will make far more money sooner than you
expected…
Use this exercise for:
-Introduction to NLP, -Behaviour Change, -Confidence, -Stress
Management, -Self-Esteem
Note: This exercise is based on one by Richard Bolstad and Margot Hamblett in their book Transforming Communication (available direct from Richard's website at www.transformations.net.nz). Another book of theirs, Transforming NLP Training, is pretty much essential for NLP trainers.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 49 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Peripheral Vision
Timing: About 5 minutes for the 'induction'
Objectives
• To give students an undeniable experience of being able to
change their own state
• To relax the group and bring it together
• To get the group used to obeying your commands
What to say beforehand (Whys)
Would it be useful to have a way of calming yourself down in two
minutes or less, without having to do a whole yoga routine or 20
minutes of progressive relaxation, while still being able to pay
attention - in fact greater attention - to what is going on around
you, *and* nobody will know that you are doing it?
Talk the whole group through the peripheral vision exercise using
the annotated script from the Peripheral Vision handout. They
should be seated with their feet flat on the floor and put down
their manuals etc.
Clear up
Afterwards, ask "I'm interested in what happened?"
Generally, students will report being relaxed.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 50 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Ask if any of them habitually have 'internal dialogue' – what
Susan Jeffers calls "the chatterbox".
Most students will admit to internal dialogue at least some of the
time.
Ask what happened to it when they were in peripheral vision.
Most students will report that it slowed down or stopped.
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
"My eyes started to hurt."
Advise the student to relax into it and not 'try' to focus. You can
illustrate this by pretending to try to read a book held side-on to
your face.
"I wanted to close my eyes."
"And you can." This is a good way to take a client into relaxation
or trance.
Advise the student that they could also do 'peripheral listening' –
listening to sounds that are either side of them but far away. If a
student raises having tinnitus as an objection, they will find that
focusing on sounds farther away will diminish the symptoms.
Peripheral listening is also useful when it's too dark to see
anything.
Peripheral feeling (being aware of every part of the body, or the
whole surface of the skin) will have a similar effect.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 51 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
"Wasn't it just your voice, being so hypnotic?"
If you want to have some fun, you can say "I wouldn't want to
suggest that my voice has special powers" while nodding slightly.
Get them to do it again, while you say nothing. They will find that
just the action of broadening their attention puts them back into
the peripheral vision state.
"But it won't help me if I space out every time I use it."
This is not an either/or thing. You don't have to go so far into the
peripheral vision state that you lose the power of speech and just
stand there drooling. You only need to broaden your attention a
little to access the deep reserves of peace and tranquillity within
each one of us.
You can say "I'm doing it now" as you talk to them.
Future Pace
Ask "When might this be useful?"
Suggested uses:
• In 'confrontations'
• (Jokily) stare-out contests
• When presenting in front of an audience, because:
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 52 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
- Peripheral vision enables you to see the whole audience at
once.
- Your attention is on your audience rather than on your
own internal state.
- It makes you more aware of tiny movements e.g.
subliminal nods when the audience agrees with you.
There are two types of light receptor cells in the retina –
'rod cells' for detecting movement and 'cone cells' for
detecting colour. The rod cells are grouped around the
outside of the retina, while cone cells are concentrated in
the middle. So when you are in peripheral vision, you are
taking in more information through the rod cells and
hence more sensitive to small movements.
This means you have a greater sense of how your
audience is responding to your presentation – you will be
able to sense when you need to liven up the presentation
and when to calm it down.
• To help you absorb information directly into your unconscious
mind – any time you feel 'overwhelmed', just go into peripheral
vision.
• To teach to your clients as a stress management/relaxation tool.
Martial arts masters are in peripheral vision the whole time – it
makes them very hard to sneak up on!
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 53 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Optional exercise:
(this exercise is ideal for students to try out during a break)
Take a walk in peripheral vision and see what you notice.
If you walk down the street where you live while in peripheral
vision, you will definitely notice things you have never seen before.
Use this exercise for:
-Confidence, -Hypnosis, -Presentation Skills, -Relaxation, -Stress
Management
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 54 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Quick Peripheral Vision
Timing: 3 minutes
Objectives
• A slightly quicker and less 'hypnotic' version of the Peripheral
Vision exercise above - use when a hypnotic induction would
not be thought appropriate
• To give students an undeniable experience of being able to
change their own state
• To relax the group and bring it together
• To get the group used to obeying your commands
What to say beforehand (Whys)
Would it be useful to have a way of calming yourself down in two
minutes or less, without having to do a whole yoga routine or 20
minutes of progressive relaxation, while still being able to pay
attention - in fact greater attention - to what is going on around
you, *and* nobody will know that you are doing it?
Talk the whole group through the peripheral vision exercise. They
can do this sitting or standing. They should have enough room
that they can spread their arms wide without hitting the student
next to them.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 55 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Procedure
Talk the class through this exercise, modelling it for them as you
go:
Lift your arms straight out in front of you, with your palms facing,
and let your fingertips touch, straight ahead of your eyes. Look at
your fingertips in a relaxed way.
Now gradually begin to move your hands apart - and continue to
look straight ahead, being aware of both sets of fingertips, just in
soft focus, so that you gradually broaden your field of vision as
your fingertips move further and further apart, being aware of
both sets of fingertips at the same time, until you can see them out
of the corners of your eyes, both sides simultaneously.
And you'll find a point at the very edges of your vision where you
can see the fingers when you wiggle them, but you don't see them
when they're still. This is the very edge - the periphery - of your
vision.
And now relax your arms and let them float down, as you continue
to pay attention to the edges of your vision... and of course you can
see everything in front of you too, just in soft focus. And extend
your awareness even further round, using your hearing or just
your spatial awareness, until you're aware of everything around
you, all the way round, 360º. And notice what happens when you
stay in peripheral vision - maybe your muscles are relaxed, maybe
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 56 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
your breathing is more relaxed, maybe you just feel calm and
aware...
And now begin to come back to normal vision, bringing everything
you liked about that experience back with you, as you let your field
of vision narrow back to normal. And make sure you're fully alert
and your vision is back to normal.
Clear up, FAQs, future pace, and optional exercise as for
Peripheral Vision exercise above.
Use this exercise for:
-Confidence, -Hypnosis, -Presentation Skills, -Relaxation, -Stress
Management
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 57 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Problems/Resources Exercise
Timing: 6 minutes for each round
Objectives
• Participants have an undeniable experience, both as coach and
as client, that the attitude of the coach affects the client's state,
beliefs and outcome
• Participants realise that 'less is more' – change can happen
without them having to 'do' anything
Procedure
In pairs: 'client' and 'coach'.
'Client' thinks of a problem (not an overwhelming one). The
'coach' thinks of A as someone with a problem. Sit silently
together for 3 minutes with this mindset.
Now, 'coach' thinks of 'client' as someone with all the resources
they need. 'Client' thinks of the same problem. Again, sit silently
together for another 3 minutes with this mindset.
Now, without any discussion, reverse the roles and run the two
steps of the exercise again.
Return to the group and check what happened. Generally the
'client' feels much better the second time, and the problem may
even have disappeared.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 58 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
What To Ask
What did you notice – as 'client'? as 'coach'?
What implications does this have for your coaching?
FAQ
How does it work? The unconscious mind picks up on body
language, facial expression, maybe subliminal reinforcements of
shifts in the client… I'm not suggesting we need to go into the
concept of 'energy' to explain this.
Use this exercise for:
-Coaching Skills, -Counselling Skills, -Introduction to NLP, -
Therapy Skills
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 59 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Clarifying Outcomes for Training
Timing: 5 minutes each way
Objectives
• To clarify participant's success criteria for the training, so that
they get more out of it
• To gain experience in helping another clarify their goals
• Participants understand the importance of having specific
success criteria for their outcomes
Procedure
In pairs, One participant takes 5 minutes to talk through what
they want from the training, and what will tell them that they
have achieved it. Then swap round.
Clear-Up
What did you discover? What will you do differently as a result?
What do you need to do to ensure you get your outcomes?
Use this exercise for:
-Introduction to NLP, -Goal Setting
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 60 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
"Bushy Brain" Exercise
Timing: about 10 minutes in total
Objectives:
• Participants warm up their creative abilities and enjoy
themselves while they do it
• This exercise makes a good warm up for any exercise where
participants have to create or design something (e.g.
Ericksonian suggestions or metaphors)
Procedure
In threes. Two people call out a random word simultaneously. The
third person constructs a connection between them. It is
important that the suggestions come at the same time so that one
suggestion does not influence the other.
For example: "fish" and "athletics" - the connection might be "Most
fish do poorly at athletics, although flying fish can perform
respectably in some events such as the long jump, as long as they
can start and finish in water. The sport they really excel at, of
course, is swimming."
Demo this a few times with suggestions from the audience. Then
get the participants to try it out in threes, rotating roles each time
until they have all had several turns at making connections.
Clear up
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 61 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
How do you feel?
"So now you know you can create connections between any two
unrelated things or concepts, this next exercise will be easy..."
Use this exercise for:
-Brainstorming, -Creativity, -Problem Solving
Note: This exercise is adapted from one in the book Training
Trances by John Overdurf and Julie Silverthorn. This book is a must for trainers, especially of NLP, and for serious students of Ericksonian hypnosis.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 62 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Present State to Desired State
Timing: 5-10 minutes per round
Objectives:
• Get familiar with Present State/Desired State model
• Improve current state
• Realise that we don't need to describe the content of a
problem before we make a difference
Procedure
Handout: Present State and Desired State
Two participants - Explorer and Guide (optionally three with an
Observer)
Explorer rates their Current State on a scale of 1-10 where 1 is
lousy and 10 is excellent (remind students that the scale is
subjective, and one person's 2 might be another person's 7).
Explorer should not describe the current state out loud, just be
aware of it. Then, describe to Guide what their Desired State (10
on the scale) is like. Describe it in the present tense, as if you are
already there. Guide can ask questions, always with the aim of
assisting the Explorer towards the Desired State.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 63 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
After 5 minutes, Explorer re-rates their now current state on the
scale (in most cases it will have gone up).
Optionally: What do you need to do to maintain your current
state at this level? What do you need to do to take it one notch up
the scale (if not at 10 already)?
Clear up
How did that go?
What happened as you described your Desired State?
What did you observe as they described their Desired State?
If the rating improved: So you've improved your present state,
perhaps even a problem state, without having to talk about it?
How does it feel to realise that?
If someone's rating stayed the same or even went down, it's worth
finding out what their internal processing actually was.
Possibilities:
• They were using a contrast frame, contrasting their desired
state with the 'reality' of their current state. This could be an
opportunity to introduce submodalities as a concept: check
out the submodalities of each representation, as the
submodalities of the Current State may have been more
compelling. If this is the case, you could play around with
them to move the Explorer towards their Desired State. This
could also be an opportunity to introduce the concept of
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 64 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
frames, specifically the Contrast Frame they were using and
the Outcome Frame that they could have used.
• The Guide was allowing the Explorer to get into the content of
the Present State, or using problem-focused rather than
solution-focused questions. The remedy here is to remind the
Guides to focus on an internal representation of the Explorer
as having all the resources they need, and of being how they
will be when they reach their Desired State.
Note: this exercise would do equally well to introduce the concept
of Solution Focus on a coaching, therapy or counselling skills
course.
Use this exercise for:
-Coaching Skills, -Counselling Skills, -Introduction to NLP, -
Therapy Skills
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 65 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
NLP in a Nutshell
Timing: 15 minutes + clear up
Objectives:
• Become aware of the importance of Outcome Focus, Sensory
Acuity, Behavioural Flexibility, and Rapport
• Consider the future impact of thinking in terms of these four
frames
Procedure
Individually and in groups of 3 or 4.
Take the participants through the 'Three Pillars of NLP' (in
Handouts).
Ask them to take 5 minutes individually to think about how these
four ideas will impact on their daily life, and then share in groups
of 3 or 4 for 10 minutes.
Clear up
What are you going to do differently in the light of these ideas?
What have you heard someone else say that has a powerful
resonance for you?
Use this exercise for:
-Introduction to NLP
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 66 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Maps of the World
Use the handout and wall chart entitled "The Map Is Not The
Territory" with any of the exercises in this section.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 67 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Drawing From Words Alone
Timing: 10 minutes each way
Objectives:
• Demonstrate the difference between the 'deep structure' of
our internal representations and the 'surface structure' of the
words we use to describe them
• Make apparent the distortions, deletions and generalisations
that we apply to incoming communications to form our
internal representations
Procedure
In pairs: Describer and Artist.
Give each Describer a copy of a line drawing of some reasonably
complicated scene - e.g. a piece of machinery or a city skyline.
The drawing should not be of something which is one
recognisable object (e.g. an Aston Martin DB7, a hammerhead
shark, or a broccoli stalk).
Describer must not let the Artist see the picture. Instead, the
Artist has to reproduce the picture solely from the Describer's
verbal description.
At the end of 10 minutes, Describer reveals the original to the
Artist. Allow them a few minutes to discuss their learnings from
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 68 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
the exercise, then swap roles. Give the new Describer a different
line drawing and repeat the exercise.
Clear up
What did you learn?
Describers - how did you go about getting the information of what
to draw to the Artist? (attempting to describe the objects in the
picture and their relation to each other, telling the artist where to
move the pencil without reference to objects, dividing the page
into squares and reproducing the lines in each one, or what?)
This exercise gains additional impact if the same image is given
to each Describer in the first round, and copies of another image
are given to each Describer in the second round. The differences
between each artist's attempted reproduction of the same image
in each round is an additional convincer for the idea that we each
have different mental filters.
Use this exercise for:
-Coaching Skills, -Counselling Skills, -Therapy Skills, -Introduction
to NLP
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 69 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Drawing My Living Room
Timing: 10 minutes each way
Objectives:
• Demonstrate the difference between the 'deep structure' of
our internal representations and the 'surface structure' of the
words we use to describe them
• Demonstrate the tendency to use information from our own
map of the world to fill in gaps in incoming information
Procedure
In pairs: Describer and Artist. This is an alternative to the
'Drawing From Words Alone' exercise above.
Give some drawing paper to the Artist. Artist must draw a picture
of the Describer's living room, based on a verbal description only.
Artist must not show the picture to Describer before the time is
up.
At the end of 10 minutes, Artist shows the picture to the
Describer and gets feedback as to its accuracy. Allow them a few
minutes to discuss their learnings from the exercise, then swap
roles.
Clear up
What did you learn?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 70 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
How close did the picture get?
Describers - did you describe everything in that picture? If not -
where did those additional elements come from? (often it's the
Artist's own living room).
Use this exercise for:
-Coaching Skills,, -Counselling Skills, -Therapy Skills, -Introduction
to NLP
Note: I first came across this exercise at a workshop given by Derek Jackson of the Northern School of NLP - www.nlpand.co.uk. He and his partner Fran Burgess run well-regarded NLP courses and often bring ‘big name’ NLP trainers to the UK.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 71 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
"The Elephant In The Room"
Timing: about 10 minutes
Objectives
• Participants become aware that people have different maps of
the world
• Participants become more aware of useful submodality
distinctions
• Participants become aware of the distinction between the
structure of an experience and the content of an experience
• Participants are introduced to calibration of non-verbal
communication
Procedure
Do this as a group - it works well with small groups of up to
around 14. Beyond this size you may want to split into smaller
groups, each led by a co-trainer or an assistant.
Ask the group to imagine an elephant. Ask each participant to
describe their elephant, keeping your questions 'clean' (i.e. not
suggesting any attributes in your questions). Elicit submodalities,
e.g. size, location, brightness, colour, moving or still.
Ask where they see the elephant. You may get content-related
answers like 'in a circus' or 'in Africa', which is a good
opportunity to point out the distinction between content and
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 72 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
structure of representations (a structure-related answer to a
question about location would describe the whereabouts of the
elephant in the person's perceptual space).
As appropriate, take opportunities presented by the participants
as they answer to point out non-verbal cues (e.g. the person may
look up if they are describing a very large elephant). If (and only
if) the location or other characteristics of the elephant are
obvious from non-verbal cues, ask the participant if your guess is
correct. This is your opportunity to show off your apparently
'magical' people-reading skills.
Clear up
What did you notice as each participant described their elephant?
What have you learned?
What are you going to do differently as a result of what you have
learned?
Use this exercise for:
-Coaching Skills,, -Counselling Skills, -Introduction to NLP, -
Listening Skills, -Therapy Skills,
Note: This exercise is a variation on one by Caitlin Walker (www.trainingattention.co.uk) that I experienced as part of an introductory session on Clean Language for the Manchester Business NLP and Emotional Intelligence Group - manchesternlp.co.uk
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 73 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Ambiguous Words
Timing: 10 minutes
Objectives:
• Participants become aware that the same words will form
varying internal representations for different people
Procedure
Do this as a group - it works well with small groups of up to
around 14. Beyond this size you may want to split into smaller
groups, each led by a co-trainer or an assistant.
Ask the group to describe the images that come into their minds
(images could include auditory, kinaesthetic or other sensory
representations as well as just visual) in response to the following
words:
1. Flower (note the submodality distinctions in the flower
images in people's answers - you may also get answers about
'flour' or about flowering as an action.
2. Bridge - answers may include descriptions of different
bridges, or of the bridge of a stringed instrument like a
violin, the control room of a ship, or possibly of some dental
procedure.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 74 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
3. Bough - answers may describe an image of someone bowing,
or a bough of a tree, or of the front of a ship (if you get the
last one and someone mentioned a ship in response to the
previous question, you could raise the possibility of
psychological priming).
Clear up
What have you learned? What do you want to ask?
What are you going to do differently as a result of what you have
learned?
Use this exercise for:
-Coaching Skills,, -Counselling Skills, -Therapy Skills, -Introduction
to NLP, -Listening Skills
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 75 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Physiology and Embodied Exercises
Mind and body are one system “ ”
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 76 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Centering To Reduce Internal Dialogue
Timing: About 3 minutes per round
Objectives:
• Participants practice calibrating change of state from non-
verbal cues
• Participants are able to reduce internal dialogue interference
and change state rapidly, becoming calmer and more centred
• Participants have evidence that mind and body are one system
Procedure:
Demo this. Client just stands there. Coach gently pushes
shoulders of client backwards and forwards and side to side,
noticing how much they move and how 'strong' client feels.
Coach now asks client to focus on 'hara' (as it's called in Japanese
martial arts traditions) or 'tan tien' (as it's called in Chinese
traditions) or central point (3 finger widths below the navel, and
half way between the front and the back of the body). When client
is doing this, coach tries pushing the shoulder again and notices
difference. Coach asks what is different for the client and
especially how it feels emotionally (NB client will usually say it
feels 'strong', but sometimes say that it doesn't feel like anything
in particular. This is fine - it just means their attention is focused
outside themselves).
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 77 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Coach then asks client to 'break state' (let go of the focus on the
hara) – distracting client if necessary with some irrelevant
question.
Coach now asks client to focus on a point at the top of their
forehead. When client is there, coach tries pushing shoulder again
and notices difference. Again, coach asks what is different for the
client and how it feels emotionally.
Expected result:
Client feels much more centred and strong when focused on the
hara, both emotionally and physically - as evidenced by them
being much harder to push back.
What to ask
What did you notice? Who often gets a lot of internal dialogue or mental chatter? (some
people will immediately know what you are talking about, others
will be saying to themselves "Internal dialogue? What's he/she on
about?")
What happened to that internal dialogue when you went into
peripheral vision? (most people will find that it slows down or
stops - you can congratulate them on achieving something in a
few minutes which takes many people years of meditation to be
able to do)
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 78 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
When might this be useful?
Be prepared for some wit to say "when someone is trying to push
you over"! Typical answers will include:
• any confrontational situation
• any time you want to feel more strong and centred,
emotionally or physically
• to pause and gather yourself before the start of any task
FAQ's
Can you use when you're sitting down, in a meeting for example?
Yes!
Future pace
Don't wait until you're in the stressful situation - practice it all
the time (e.g. when you are walking down the street) so it
becomes second nature and is available to you when you need it.
Variations
To really make the contrast clear between centred and uncentred,
you can ask the demo subject to tense up and resist your push as
hard as they can. They should go backwards easily (as the
different tensed-up muscle groups cancel each other out). If they
are resisting by leaning their entire weight against your hand, you
can take your hand away and they will have to step forward.
Then get them to centre as before.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 79 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Pushing the shoulder is the "PC' version of this exercise. You
could push in the upper centre of their chest instead (get their
permission first). Male trainers, use your discretion if your
volunteer is a woman in a low-cut top!
Use this exercise for:
-Therapy Skills, -Introduction to NLP, -Self-Esteem, -Stress
Management, -Dealing With Difficult People, -Confidence, -
Presentation Skills
Note: centering has been around for centuries in yoga and martial arts. I first came across it used as a standalone exercise for confidence and ‘presence’ at an NLP group session run by Alan Mars, an Alexander, Aikido and singing teacher who is also an NLP practitioner. Alan has written a very useful little book for presenters which incorporates some great tips from NLP and Alexander Technique: Presenter: Be Your Best... and Beyond
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 80 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Centering With Memory of Challenging
Situation
Timing: about 5 minutes per round
Objectives:
• Participants gain a technique for building confidence in
situations that they have previously found challenging
• Participants get further practice in noticing state changes
• Participants gain confidence in assisting clients in accessing
resources
Procedure
Two participants – coach and client. Client stands there and coach
asks client to recall an incident they found challenging (only
about 5 on a scale of 0-10, not a full-blown trauma!)
When client has recalled the incident fully, coach gently pushes
shoulders of client backwards and forwards and side to side,
noticing how much they move and how 'strong' client feels. Then
break state.
Now coach asks client to focus on the hara and become centred –
then recall the challenging incident again while remaining centred
and focused on the hara. Coach again tests by pushing shoulder.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 81 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Expected results
Client feels less affected by challenging incident, perhaps
imagines being able to handle it better, and feels more confident
about handling it better next time. And/or the 'problem' doesn't
seem like a problem any more.
Use this exercise for:
-Therapy Skills, -Introduction to NLP, -Self-Esteem, -Stress
Management, -Dealing With Difficult People, -Confidence
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 82 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
“Weak Arm/Strong Arm" Exercise
Timing: about 3 minutes each way
Objectives:
• To show that mind and body are one system
• To show that self-talk affects results
Procedure
Demo this. Have a volunteer stand in front of the group with their
dominant arm* (i.e. the one they write with) held out to the side
at shoulder height. Press down on the forearm while the
volunteer resists as hard as they can (without wrenching their
shoulder). This is your benchmark.
Now have the student hold the arm out again while they say out
loud "I am weak" five times. Press down on the forearm again. It
will go down more easily.
Now have the student hold the arm out again while they say "I am
strong" five times. Press down on the forearm again. It will be
much stronger.
Check that the group noticed.
Now have the group pair up and try this exercise for themselves.
* because this will be controlled by the brain hemisphere that processes speech.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 83 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Clear up
What have you learned?
What are you going to do differently as a result of what you have
learned?
Note: this would make a nice precursor to the ‘Dealing With A
Critical Inner Voice’ exercise as it shows the impact of what you
tell yourself.
Use this exercise for:
-Self-Esteem, -Stress Management, -Confidence, -Spiritual
Development, -Goal Setting, -Motivation
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 84 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Group Weak Arm/Strong Arm Exercise
Timing: 5 minutes
Objectives:
• Illustrates power of group expectations
• To throw in something weird and freaky to keep the group on
their toes, especially if one or two members are too 'internally
referenced' (ie they think they know it all already) near the
start of a training
Procedure
Call for one volunteer, and send them out of the room.
Instructions for the rest of the group: trainer is going to press
down on the volunteer's arm twice (as in Weak Arm/ Strong Arm
exercise above).
The first time, the group should silently think "He or she (as
applicable) is weak."
Break state for volunteer.
The second time, the group should silently think "He or she is
strong."
Volunteer should be stronger the second time.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 85 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Clear up
What happened there? (answers might include telepathy,
unconscious reading of non-verbal signals of audience
expectation by volunteer)
What situations do you encounter where the feelings or
expectations of the group may influence your performance?
What could the volunteer have done to counter group
expectations? (e.g. volunteer could have repeated "I am strong" the
first time - you could try this out)
Future pace
What could you do in the situations you face where group
influence impacts your performance?
Use this exercise for:
-Self-Esteem, -Stress Management, -Confidence, -Spiritual
Development, -Goal Setting, -Motivation, -Decision Making
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 86 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
The "Walk of Grace and Power"
Timing: 10 minutes per round
Objectives:
• Participants notice new distinctions in the way they walk and
hold their bodies, and how this influences their thoughts and
feelings
• Participants practice calibrating another's state from non-
verbal evidence
• Participants get to play with a behavioural "as if" frame
• Participants become more resourceful in a specific situation
of their choice
• Participants gain a useful "walking" resource anchor
What to say beforehand (Whys)
Mind and body are one system - so would you like to have a way
of getting yourself into an optimum resourceful state when you
need it (for example on the way to a job interview or important
meeting) that you don't need to take any extra preparation time
for? In fact you can do this as you walk from your car or the
station to your destination...
Procedure
2 participants - 'Explorer' and 'Coach'
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 87 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
You could demo this first. This exercise requires a room with
plenty of space - or ideally, do it outside.
1. Explorer thinks of some situation in which they would like to
feel more resourceful. While thinking about this situation, walk
on a 'track' of at least 4 metres - this could be in a straight line
or an oval. Coach observes how the Explorer walks.
2. Explorer, aided by the Coach, identifies the resource state or
states that would be useful in that situation. Explorer walks "as
if' they are in that resourceful state or combination of states.
Coach observes the differences between the 'unresourceful'
and 'resourceful' walks.
3. As the Explorer continues to walk, Coach suggests further
changes to the Explorer's physiology (e.g. posture, angle of
head, breathing, length of stride, tucking in pelvis, weight
distribution between feet, how much the arms swing, etc) to
feel even more resourceful and reach a state of excellence.
Slightly amplifying the differences between the 'problem' and
'excellent' walks may be a good place to start.
4. Explorer experiences the new walk, noticing what is different.
Coach makes sure that the walk and the excellent state is
maintained.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 88 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
5. When the Explorer can maintain the walk and the associated
excellent state, they revisit by placing the 'problem' situation
on the track and walking through it and beyond it.
6. When the Explorer has gone beyond the 'problem' situation,
stop walking.
7. Test and future pace.
Swap roles.
Clear up
What happened to that problem situation?
What did your coach do or say that was particularly helpful?
Which change to your walk made the most positive difference?
Use this exercise for:
-Self-Esteem, -Stress Management, -Confidence
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 89 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Sensory Acuity, Calibration and
Rapport
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 90 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Visual Acuity Exercise
Timing: about 5 minutes each way
Objectives:
• Students learn to make finer distinctions in visual calibration
• Students realise that they can discern quite small differences
• Students build trust in their unconscious minds
Procedure
Handout: Sensory Acuity (V.I.B.E.S)
Demo this procedure first, with a volunteer as 'A' and the whole
audience as 'B'.
Two participants, A and B. A thinks of someone that they like.
Imagine the person you like is in the room, that you can hear
their voice, that they are close enough to touch.
Now A thinks of someone they don't like. B looks for the
differences between the two. A continues to alternate between
'like' and 'don't like' until B feels they can calibrate the
differences.
Now A thinks of one or the other, without identifying which. B
identifies which one they are thinking of. If B doesn't get it right,
go back to the calibration stage. Continue until B is consistently
right.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 91 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
What to Ask
What did you learn?
What did you notice?
As a coach, what told you that they were thinking of one or the
other?
Who got it consistently right or consistently 'wrong'?
How might this be useful in future?
FAQs
"I got it wrong consistently."
So your unconscious mind consistently recognised the differences
between 'like' and 'don't like', even though your conscious mind
swapped the labels round.
"I identified the people correctly, but I wasn't consciously aware
of any signs."
So you can trust your unconscious mind to recognise differences
that your conscious mind isn't yet aware of.
"I can't think of anyone I dislike." (or sometimes "anyone I like!")
So go for someone you like intensely versus someone you're
indifferent to.
Use this exercise for:
-Coaching Skills, -Counselling Skills, -Therapy Skills, -Emotional
Intelligence, -Influencing, -Interpersonal Skills, -Introduction to
NLP, -Sales
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 92 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Auditory Acuity: Like/Don’t Like
Exercise
Timing: about 5 minutes each way
Objectives:
• As for the previous exercise, for the auditory channel
Procedure
Handout: Sensory Acuity (V.I.B.E.S)
Two participants, A and B (NB choose a different partner from the
previous acuity exercise so as to practice your acuity skills with a
variety of subjects). A and B sit back to back (or with their eyes
closed) to screen out visual evidence. Make sure they or their
chairs are not touching – to screen out kinaesthetic evidence.
A thinks of someone they like and counts out loud to 10. Then
someone they don't like and counts out loud to 10. A alternates
between the two until B feels they can tell the difference.
Now A thinks of one or the other and counts to 10, without
identifying which it is. B identifies which one they are thinking of.
If B doesn't get it right, go back to the calibration stage. Continue
until B is consistently right.
Then swap round and repeat the exercise.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 93 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
What To Ask and FAQ's
As for the previous exercise.
When might this be useful?
Any communication by phone or where visual evidence is limited.
As a culture we rely heavily on the visual channel.
Use this exercise for:
-Coaching Skills, -Counselling Skills, -Therapy Skills, -Emotional
Intelligence, -Influencing, -Interpersonal Skills, -Introduction to
NLP, -Sales
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 94 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Auditory Acuity: Clapping Exercise
Timing: about 3 minutes each way
Objectives
This is an alternative to the previous auditory acuity exercise -
use where you have an odd number of participants.
Procedure
Handout: Sensory Acuity (V.I.B.E.S)
3 or more participants: an Explorer and 2 or more helpers.
Explorer sits or stands with eyes closed.
One by one the helpers clap hands once and say their names.
Repeat until the Explorer believes they can identify each person's
handclap.
Helpers move around silently so the Explorer can't identify them
by location. Each time a helper claps hands, the Explorer calls out
the name of the helper. If the Explorer gets it right, helper says
'Yes'. If the Explorer gets it wrong, helper claps again and says
their name.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 95 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Continue until Explorer consistently identifies each helper by
handclap, then swap until everyone has had a turn at being the
Explorer.
Clear up
What did you learn?
What did you notice?
When might it be useful to notice finer auditory distinctions?
Alternative
Helper takes a number of coins of different denominations,
identifying each in turn. When Explorer is ready, helper drops a
coin at random and Explorer identifies it by sound alone. Repeat
until Explorer correctly identifies each coin.
Use this exercise for:
-Introduction to NLP
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 96 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Kinaesthetic Acuity: Like/Don't Like
Exercise
Timing: about 5 minutes each way
Objectives:
As for previous like/don't like exercises
Procedure
Handout: Sensory Acuity (V.I.B.E.S)
Two participants, A and B (NB choose a different partner from
previous acuity exercises so as to practice your acuity skills with
a variety of subjects).
A and B sit opposite each other and slightly to each other's right,
so they can comfortably hold each other's hand as if they are
about to shake. This is a silent exercise, and B's eyes should be
closed - to screen out visual and auditory evidence so that the
feel of the hand is the only sensory input that B has from A.
A thinks of someone they. A then breaks state and thinks of
someone they don't. A alternates between the two until B feels
they can tell the difference.
Now A thinks of one or the other, without identifying which it is.
B identifies which one they are thinking of. If B doesn't get it
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 97 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
right, go back to the calibration stage. Continue until B is
consistently right.
Then swap round and repeat the exercise.
What To Ask and FAQ's
As for the previous exercise.
When might this be useful?
Picking up information from a handshake. Bodywork therapies.
Maybe contact sports. And I'm sure you can think of other
contexts in which you would like to get a sense of what someone
is thinking or feeling from touch alone...
After participants have done acuity exercises for each sensory
channel:
Who found the visual exercise easiest? Who found auditory the
easiest? Who found kinaesthetic the easiest?
Of course, we don't know if this is because you find that sensory
channel easiest, or if you just had a partner that was particularly
easy to read. The only way to know will be to practice your acuity
skills with lots of different people.
Did you find any sensory channel harder than the others to notice
distinctions in?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 98 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Remind students that they can build on their strengths, and that
an improvement in a 'weaker' channel can yield even more results
than a similar-sized improvement in a channel in which they are
already strong.
Use this exercise for:
-Introduction to NLP, -Bodywork
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 99 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Calibrating States
Timing: about 10 minutes per round plus clear up
Objectives
• Practice calibrating two contrasting states
• A partial alternative to the single-modality calibration
exercises above that you can use when you have less time
available
• Alternatively, more demanding follow-up to the single-
modality exercises above which require the participant to
calibrate in two or three modalities
Procedure
Two participants, A and B. Use the V.I.B.E.S. handout.
A tells B about a past unpleasant experience (give the usual
warning about not choosing a really traumatic experience - you
want something that is around 5 on the ‘Richter Scale’ of
emotional upset. Keep an eye on the emotional states of
participants, note how B handles the situation if A starts going
into a strong upsurge of emotion, and intervene if necessary
before A goes too deep into an abreaction).
B notices non-verbal information (as in the V.I.B.E.S handout) as
evidence of state change. Additionally, if you have covered them
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 100 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
by this point, B could also note predicates, values, meta model
violations, and/or meta programs.
After 3 minutes A breaks state and moves to a different location.
Now A tells B about a very pleasant experience. B calibrates as
before.
After 3 minutes B describes only what they noticed about
differences between unpleasant and pleasant states in sensory
terms, without evaluating or ‘mind reading’.
Switch roles and repeat.
Clear up
What did you notice? (NB watch out for ‘mind reads’ - if these
show up, remind participants to stick to sensory evidence).
As A - any surprises in B’s description?
What have you learned? When would this be useful?
What are you going to do differently as a result of what you’ve
learned?
Variations
• Have A recall the situations silently - B calibrates just the
visual signs.
• Add an observer C - what do they notice that is different to B?
This will mean the exercise takes at least 50% longer.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 101 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
• You can re-run the exercise later in the course just calibrating
for predicates and/or meta model violations or values.
Use this exercise for:
-Coaching Skills, -Counselling Skills, -Therapy Skills, -Emotional
Intelligence, -Influencing, -Interpersonal Skills, -Introduction to
NLP, -Customer Service, -Sales
Note: This exercise is based on one in David Molden’s very useful book NLP Business Masterclass: Driving Peak Performance With NLP. It does a great job of adapting NLP patterns to a business context (e.g. a version of the six-step reframe for use with a team).
David Molden is an NLP business consultant, coach and trainer. His web site is at http://www.quadrant1.com
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 102 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Finding The Boundaries Of Personal
Space
Timings: 5 minutes
Objectives:
• Participants develop their sensory acuity
• Participants get a sense of the boundaries of their own
personal space, and how this may vary for different people
What to say beforehand (Whys)
Introduce the concept of personal space - a crucial element in
rapport.
Mention how people with a visual preference are usually
comfortable having people where they can see them, auditory will
like people where they can hear them clearly, and kinaesthetic
will prefer to be close enough to touch the other person.
Point out what can happen when 'visual' and 'kinaesthetic' meet -
the visual always backing away and the kinaesthetic always trying
to get closer - and what a video of this would look like speeded
up (a closing sequence of the Benny Hill show).
Procedure
Handout (optional): Sensory Acuity (V.I.B.E.S)
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 103 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Demo this first with a volunteer. Two participants - A and B.
A approaches B until A notices the non-verbal signal (a flinch, a
wince, a change in breathing) that says that the boundary of
personal space has been crossed. Find out where the boundaries
are by approaching B from different directions (they may not be a
constant distance). Swap roles.
Then change partners and repeat, as many times as you can
before the end of the exercise.
Clear up
What did you discover?
How did you know that you had intruded on B's personal space?
What differences did you notice about how far out the boundaries
were? - from different directions? - same sex or different sex
partner? - any other factors (e.g. the relative height of the
partners)?
Future pace
What are you going to do differently as a result of what you have
learned from this exercise?
Use this exercise for:
-Coaching Skills, -Counselling Skills, -Therapy Skills, -Emotional
Intelligence, -Influencing, -Interpersonal Skills, -Introduction to
NLP, -Customer Service, -Sales
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 104 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Lie Detection Exercise
Timing: 10 minutes per round
Objectives:
• Participants improve their sensory acuity (note that voice
tonality as well as visual cues may be significant)
• Participants gain confidence in their ability to 'read' people,
encouraging them to pay more attention in future
Procedure
Handout: Sensory Acuity (V.I.B.E.S)
2 participants: 'Interrogator' and 'Suspect'
Instructions for the 'Interrogator':
1. Ask your partner 10 questions to which you know the answer
to be ‘yes’. They should answer truthfully. Look at them in
slight peripheral vision and calibrate their non-verbal
responses.
2. Now ask your partner another 10 questions to which you know
the answer to be ‘no’. This time they should lie by saying ‘yes’.
Calibrate the differences to step one.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 105 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
3. Now ask them questions to which you are not sure of the
correct answer. They can answer truthfully or lie. You guess
which. Check the accuracy of your guess with them after each
one.
4. Turn yourself between each question so that your partner is in
a different part of your visual field. Notice if this makes any
difference to the accuracy of your guesses.
Clear up
Who could tell when their partner was lying?
What told you? (NB this can lead into a discussion of various signs
to calibrate e.g. changes in skin tone, breathing changes, changes
in voice tonality)
Anyone get it right but not consciously pick up any differences?
The unconscious mind notices more than we are consciously
aware of.
Anyone get it wrong 100% of the time? If you are getting 100%
wrong guesses, your unconscious mind can still tell the difference
- just say the opposite of what your conscious mind thinks is
correct.
Note: This one is based on the ‘Truth Detection’ exercise by Jonathan Altfeld, whose trainings I highly recommend: www.altfeld.com/mastery
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 106 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Use this exercise for:
-Counselling Skills, -Therapy Skills, -Introduction to NLP,
-Influencing
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 107 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Tracking Two Minds Exercise
Timings: 5 minutes per round
Objectives:
• Participants improve their observation and matching skills
• Participants enter a 'flow' state
• Participants improve their calibration skills (when checking
that the Matcher is near the edge of abilities)
• Participants warm up for later exercises and learning
What to say to introduce the exercise (Whys)
OK, you've tracked the movements directed by one brain. That's
too easy, and you can do better. Now you're going to take your
observation and matching skills to the next level by tracking two
brains at once!
Procedure
Three participants - Mover 1, Mover 2 and a Matcher.
Demonstrate this initially with two volunteers - just to show
participants how the exercise works, not taking it to completion.
This should be a silent exercise, to allow participants to
concentrate on sensory information and allow them to relax into
the experience.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 108 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Mover 1 and Mover 2 stand shoulder to shoulder. Matcher stands
facing them at a comfortable distance.
Mover 1 and Mover 2 begin to move their outside arms only -
slowly at first. Matcher's job is to mirror the arm movements of
both (this will need peripheral vision).
The job of the Movers is to keep the Matcher at or near the edge
of his or her ability to track. In practice this means gradually
speeding up their movements and making them more complex -
and slowing down again if the Matcher loses track.
Rotate after 5 minutes until everyone has had a turn in each role.
What to expect
Laughter after each round, possibly of joy, possibly of relief.
Participants entering 'flow' state, and feeling somewhat light-
headed or 'buzzy'. Is this new neuronal connections being formed
in the corpos callosum that connects the two hemispheres of the
brain, and thereby increasing their intelligence? We have no way
of knowing.
Clear up
How are you feeling?
Matchers - what did you do that helped you to track both sides
simultaneously? What did you do that got in the way?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 109 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Movers - how did you know when the Matcher was approaching
the edge of their abilities?
Use this exercise for:
-Introduction to NLP, -Creativity (because it puts people in a
‘buzzy’ state)
Note: This exercise is based on one by the US-based LP trainer Jonathan Altfeld, whose trainings I highly recommend: www.altfeld.com/mastery You can see how Jonathan does this exercise on his excellent Building Hypnotic Rapport DVD set, part of the NLP Skills Builder series.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 110 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
"Sticky Fingers" Exercise
Timing: 5 minutes each way
Objectives:
• Participants gain experience of non-verbal or 'embodied'
rapport
• Participants experience altered state (eyes closed, plus
''becoming one' with another person
• Atmosphere in room changes rapidly (if needed - e.g. as a
pattern interrupt if participants are getting into unresourceful
state or becoming disruptive)
Procedure
In pairs - A and B. Demo this first. You will need a lot of clear
space in the room. This is a silent exercise.
Face each other in pairs. A holds up palms at shoulder height. B
places the tips of middle fingers in the center of A's palms, and
closes eyes.
A now gradually begins to move their hands. B's job is to
maintain contact between the fingertips and A's palms, very
lightly (almost not quite touching).
A's job is to lead B around, keeping them at the edge of their
ability to follow (ie not too fast, not too slow). A will gradually
speed up and make larger movement.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 111 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
When you demo this, get to the point where you step back,
forward or sideways, so that B has to move their feet in order to
stay upright.
It's helpful to play some restful music in the background -
Hanshan Temple from Buddhist Chants and Peace Music by Jin
Long Uen is very good.
When participants have had a reasonable time (5 minutes) to
experience the activity, swap round.
Variation: if doing this outside on a lawn where there's plenty of
room to spread out, both participants can close their eyes.
Clear Up
How do you feel now?
What did you notice?
What was it like being led with your eyes closed?
What was it like leading?
What information could you get just from the touch of the
fingertip? (usually A will be able to sense very easily how relaxed
B is)
What are you going to do differently as a result of what you've
learned from this exercise?
What to expect: often the pairs reach the point where it's not
clear which is leading and which is following.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 112 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
FAQ's
Why did we do that? This question comes up sometimes from the
more 'in their heads' participants, so it's worth giving plenty of
reasons up front before the exercise starts.
Reasons could include:
• We're going to experience non-verbal rapport
• We're going to experience being part of a larger system than
just one person.
• We're going to experience an everyday altered state.
• We're going to have an experience of taking in information
through different channels (kinaesthetic) than those we
normally use (visual). So pay attention to what you notice.
Use this exercise for:
-Coaching Skills, -Counselling Skills, -Therapy Skills, -Emotional
Intelligence, -Spiritual Development
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 113 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Listening/Not Listening
Timing: 7 minutes each round
Objectives:
• To highlight the effects of being fully attending vs. not fully
attending
• To illustrate how we naturally 'do' rapport in everyday life
• Participants sharpen their sensory acuity
• Participants recognise the role of minimal encouragers as
positive behavioural feedback
Procedure
Handouts: Rapport
Three participants: A, B and C.
Chairs arranged in a triad (ie at the points of an equilateral
triangle).
A – has a conversation with B about something A is interested in
(i.e. a subject they can talk about with ease).
B's job is to be interested for the first 2 minutes, then (without
overtly indicating it) to be completely uninterested for another
two minutes. For the final minute B reverts to being interested.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 114 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
C's job is to observe the two participants in relation to each other
(ie not take part in the conversation). C should be in peripheral
vision. At the end of the round, C can give a couple of minutes of
sensory specific feedback on what they observed.
A can also give feedback about how they felt at different stages of
the exercise.
Then rotate (it's best to anchor the roles to individual chairs) until
each participant has been in all three roles.
Clear up
What did you learn/what did you notice – as A? as B? as C?
What are the implications for your coaching/for your life?
Draw attention to the role of minimal encouragers (grunts, nods,
smiles etc) as behavioural feedback encouraging the speaker to
continue.
Use this exercise for:
-Coaching Skills, -Counselling Skills, -Therapy Skills, -Emotional
Intelligence, -Influencing, -Interpersonal Skills, -Introduction to
NLP, -Customer Service, -Sales, -Team-Building, -Listening Skills
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 115 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Quick Listening/Not Listening
Timing: 2 minutes
Use this one in preference to the above if you are short of time,
and training managers rather than coaches or therapists who will
be more patient with in-depth exploration.
Objectives
• To highlight the effects of being fully attending vs. not fully
attending
• To illustrate how we naturally do rapport in everyday life.
• Participants sharpen their sensory acuity
• Participants recognise the role of minimal encouragers as
positive behavioural feedback
Procedure
Handouts: Rapport
Two participants: A, B and C.
A – has a conversation with B about something A is interested in
(e.g. their best ever holiday)
B's job is to be interested for the first minute, then (without
overtly indicating it) to lose interest.
No need to rotate roles - the point will be made on the first go.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 116 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Clear up
What did you learn/what did you notice – as A? as B?
What are the implications?
Draw attention to the role of minimal encouragers (grunts, nods,
smiles etc) as behavioural feedback encouraging the speaker to
continue.
Use this exercise for:
-Influencing, -Interpersonal Skills, , -Management, -Introduction to
NLP, -Customer Service, -Sales, -Team-Building
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 117 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Matching/Mismatching
Timing: 7 minutes each round
Objectives:
• Participants gain confidence in subtle matching
• Participants understand the different impacts of non-verbal
matching and mismatching
• Participants sharpen their sensory acuity
Procedure
Handouts: Rapport
Three participants: A (client), B (coach), C (observer).
Again, A has a conversation with B about something A can talk
easily about. B's job is to match non-verbally (subtly, using cross-
matching) for the first two minutes, mismatch for the next two
minutes, and match again for the last minute. B should be
broadly matching on content throughout.
C's job is to observe the two participants in relation to each other
(ie not take part in the conversation). C should be in peripheral
vision. At the end of the round, C can give a couple of minutes of
sensory specific feedback on what they observed.
A can also give feedback about how they felt at different stages of
the exercise.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 118 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Then rotate (it's best to anchor the roles to individual chairs) until
each participant has been in all three roles.
Clear up
What did you learn/what did you notice – as A? as B? as C?
What are the implications for your coaching/for your life?
Use this exercise for:
-Coaching Skills, -Counselling Skills, -Therapy Skills, -Emotional
Intelligence, -Influencing, -Interpersonal Skills, -Introduction to
NLP, -Customer Service, -Sales
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 119 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Voice Matching
Timing: 5 minutes each round
Objectives:
• Students improve their auditory acuity and voice matching
skills.
Procedure
Handouts: Rapport
Three participants: 'speaker', 'matcher', and 'coach'.
'Speaker' says a short sentence out loud, such as 'My awareness is
constantly improving.'
'Matcher' repeats the sentence back, matching volume, speed,
tone and emphasis as exactly as they can.
'Coach' gives sensory-based feedback to the matcher on how to
get even closer to the original.
Speaker repeats the same sentence, matcher matches it again, and
the coach provides more feedback.
Continue until a close match is achieved, or until the 5 minutes is
up.
Rotate the roles until everyone has had a turn.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 120 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Clear up
What did you notice? as speaker? as matcher? as coach?
When will this be useful? (when coaching, selling or
communicating by phone)
Use this exercise for:
-Coaching Skills, -Counselling Skills, -Therapy Skills, -Emotional
Intelligence, -Influencing, -Interpersonal Skills, -Introduction to
NLP, -Customer Service, -Sales, -Listening Skills
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 121 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Pacing and Leading Exercise
Timing: 7 minutes each round
Objectives:
• Participants gain confidence in pacing and leading.
• Participants can recognise when they are in rapport.
Procedure
Handouts: Rapport
Three participants: Speaker, Matcher and Observer.
Speaker has a conversation with Matcher about something
interesting. Matcher subtly matches until confident that rapport
has been achieved. Then, Matcher makes some subtle action and
notices whether the Speaker follows this lead. Matcher's aim is
that the Speaker should not consciously be aware of the
attempted lead.
If the lead is followed, Matcher can experiment with further leads.
If not, Matcher returns to more pacing until rapport has been re-
established, then attempts another lead.
Observer can give 2 minutes of sensory-based feedback to
Matcher. Speaker can also give feedback about what they noticed.
Rotate roles until everyone has experienced each role.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 122 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Clear up
What did you notice – as Observer? as Matcher? as Speaker?
Which leads worked? Which didn't? What was the difference?
Check for 'unconscious leads' – perhaps the Speaker or the
Matcher did something unconsciously which the other followed.
The Observer is in a good position to spot this.
When will this be useful? To influence a client – e.g. to lead them
covertly into a more resourceful state at the start of a session.
Also to influence in other situations e.g. sales.
FAQs
"I couldn’t get them to follow my leads."
More rapport needed. Practice! and look out for when pacing and
leading occurs unconsciously in everyday life.
Use this exercise for:
-Coaching Skills, -Counselling Skills, -Therapy Skills, -Emotional
Intelligence, -Influencing, -Interpersonal Skills, -Introduction to
NLP, -Customer Service, -Sales
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 123 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
I/You/We Exercise
Timing: 3 minutes per round
Objectives:
• Participants explore different ways of relating
• Participants experience that what you pay attention to affects
relationship, and likelihood of success in coaching
• Participants become more aware of subtle nonverbal
influences
Procedure
In pairs - "Coach" and "Client". This is a silent exercise.
1st round: Client thinks of a problem. Coach sits with Client and
thinks "I".
Leave them for a couple of minutes. Then - Coach gets up and
moves around to break state.
2nd round: Client continues to think of the problem. Coach sits
with Client and thinks "You".
Leave them for a couple of minutes. Then - Coach gets up and
moves around to break state.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 124 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
3rd round: Client continues to think of the problem. Coach sits
with Client and thinks "We". Leave for a couple of minutes as
before.
You only need to do this one way.
Clear up
What was your experience as Client?
What differences did you notice between "I", "You", and "We"?
What was your experience as Coach?
What to expect
Most "Clients" will find that during "You" and particularly "We",
they experienced a lessening of the problem. "I" generally doesn't
help much.
Variations
To make this more robust as a test of how much the attention
focus of the Coach affects the outcome, you could give the
Coaches their instructions for each round secretly. As far as the
Clients know, each round is supposed to be the same as the last -
differences in their experiences between each round can only be
due to any differences they consciously or unconsciously detect
in behaviour of the (silent) coach.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 125 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Use this exercise for:
-Coaching Skills, -Counselling Skills, -Therapy Skills, -Influencing,
-Interpersonal Skills, -Introduction to NLP, -Spiritual Development
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 126 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Language Exercises
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 127 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
"Don't Think Of A..."
Timing: about 2 minutes
Objectives:
• Participants have an undeniable experience demonstrating
that the unconscious mind does not process negations
• Participants gain a method for indirect suggestion
Procedure
Just do this in passing as you talk to the class. First tell them that
the unconscious mind does not process negation, which is a
conscious mind concept. "Don't believe me? Whatever you do,
don't think of a blue rhinoceros. And I want you to continue not
thinking of a blue rhinoceros for the rest of the day. Are you still
not thinking of a blue rhinoceros?"
What to expect
Participants will laugh as they realise that they are, in fact,
thinking of a blue rhinoceros as soon as you tell them not to
think of it.
Clear up
What happened as soon as I asked you not to think of a blue
rhinoceros?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 128 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
In order to process the words "don't think of a blue rhinoceros"
you have to form some kind of image of a blue rhinoceros. Since
you can't form an image of 'not' something, it's as if the
unconscious mind simply deletes the "not".
So whenever you tell someone not to do something, it puts the
idea in their head. You may have seen this with parents and small
children in the supermarket - "Don't touch those sweets" puts the
idea of touching the sweets in the child's mind, if it wasn't there
already.
So - if you want to motivate someone to do something (and this
includes yourself), tell them what you want them to do, rather
than what you don't want them to do. Otherwise, it's like going to
that supermarket with a shopping list of what you don't want and
expecting to come home with the right things.
And of course, I'm not suggesting that you play with the idea of
using negation as a means of putting ideas in people's
unconscious minds without their conscious minds noticing. I
would never suggest that...
Use this exercise for:
-Coaching Skills, -Counselling Skills, -Therapy Skills, -Influencing, -
Interpersonal Skills, -Introduction to NLP, -Customer Service, -
Sales
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 129 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
This/That
Timing: 3 minutes
Objectives
• Participants understand the differences between 'this'
(associated) and 'that' (dissociated)
• Participants become more aware generally of the importance
of precision in language
Procedure
Hold up a small object (e.g. a marker pen). Ask the group to look
at it while thinking "This pen. This pen."
Break state.
Now hold it up again in the same place and ask the group to look
at it while thinking "That pen. That pen."
Clear up
What differences did you notice between 'this' and 'that'?
(most people will experience "this pen" as feeling closer and more
'theirs' than "that pen".
Use this exercise for:
-Coaching Skills, -Counselling Skills, -Therapy Skills, -Influencing, -
Interpersonal Skills, -Introduction to NLP, -Sales
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 130 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Chunking Exercise
Timing: 5 minutes per round + 2-5 minutes feedback/discussion
between rounds + 5 minutes clear-up
Objectives
• Participants gain experience of maintaining rapport through
matching "chunk size" in conversation
• Participants may gain some experience of leading "chunk size"
in a particular direction
• Participants are aware of the importance of flexibility in
matching chunk size
• Participants increase their rapport skills
Procedure
Handout: The Hierarchy of Ideas
Wall Chart: The Hierarchy of Ideas
In threes. A and B sit facing each other. C stands behind B.
A initiates a conversation with B. B matches A, especially chunk
size in the conversation. C directs A to chunk up, down or
sideways at random by silently pointing up, down or sideways (NB
this has to be out of B's field of vision).
Change over after 5 minutes so each person gets to experience
each role.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 131 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Before they start, instruct the group "Don't have too much fun".
Clear up
What did you notice?
What do you want to ask? What do I need to know?
What did you find easiest – big picture, details or in between?
Which direction was easiest for you – chunking up, down or
sideways?
Use this exercise for:
-Coaching Skills, -Counselling Skills, -Listening Skills, -Therapy
Skills, -Decision Making, -Management
Note: As far as I know, this exercise was developed by Tad James www.nlpcoaching.com
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 132 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Meta Model Exercise
Timing: 5 minutes per round plus clear up
Objectives:
• Participants get better at detecting and naming Meta Model
'violations'
• Participants become more skilled at responding with
appropriate questions or 'challenges'
Procedure
Do this exercise in groups of 4-6.
Take a small number of meta model patterns (for example, Mind
Reads, Lost Performatives, Cause-Effect and Complex
Equivalences can be grouped as 'Distortions').
Round 1: As a group, generate examples (not the responses) of
each pattern and write them down. Keep the examples short!
Round 2: Mix up the groups. One person reads out an example at
random. Another person identifies what pattern it is. A third
person generates an appropriate response question and writes it
down.
After the clear-up, you can mix up the groups and tackle another
set of patterns.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 133 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Clear up
After the first set, ask for examples of each pattern and the
'challenges' that go with them to check the groups are on the
right track.
You may find that some examples fall into more than one
category, which is why you asked them to keep the examples
short - the longer they are, the more chance that additional and
unintended 'violations' will show up.
If it is some students' first encounter with the Meta Model, watch
out for bad anchors of school and limiting beliefs of "I can't do
this" being triggered. This is going to happen occasionally, what
with the number of components in the Meta Model and the
jargonistic names of the patterns.
To combat this, you can switch to more meaningful names where
possible (e.g. 'value judgements' rather than 'lost performatives'),
and emphasise that it's far more important that they can spot the
patterns and come up with appropriate responses than to
remember the exact name of the pattern, unless they are
intending to become NLP trainers.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 134 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
One-Word Reframing
Timing: 5-10 minutes plus clear up
Objectives:
• Practice reframing a term to have more or less intensity, or to
have more of a positive or negative slant, while retaining
semantic well-formedness
Procedure
Introduce Russell’s examples, perhaps with some others to
illustrate the concept. Give out the ‘One-Word Reframing’
handout.
Suggest that they could regard the connotations as a continuum,
decide which direction they want to go (e.g from ‘good’ to ‘great’
to amplify, or ‘distracting’ to ‘creative’ to reframe from
undesirable to desirable), and pick words at different points along
the continuum.
Ask the group to come up with reframes that ‘diminish’ qualities,
actions or events usually regarded negatively:
e.g. Late -> tardy, delayed
Aggressive ->.............. , .............. e.g. no-nonsense, straightforward
Obstinate -> .............. , .............. e.g. stubborn, persistent
Disaster -> .............. , .............. e.g. accident, occurrence
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 135 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Nitpicking -> .............. , .............. etc.
And reframes that increase a desirable but weak or so-so quality
or action:
e.g. Not bad -> OK, good
Pleasant -> .............. , .............. e.g. enjoyable, exquisite
Interesting -> .............. , .............. e.g. fascinating, compelling
Acceptable -> .............. , ..............
Clever -> .............. , .............. etc
Clear up
What did you learn?
How easy was it to find words that made sense but reframed the
judgement or associations?
As you look back, in what contexts have you already used
reframing like this, maybe without labelling it as such?
When could you use this method? Where do you see it being used?
(debates, complaints or objection handling, coaching and therapy,
on your own internal dialogue)
What might you want to watch out for when using one-word
reframes? (when the reframing word appears to belittle the
significance of what the other party is saying, when it clashes
with their values, when the associations are too far from the
original term for the other party to get there in one go - in each
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 136 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
case the result could be a loss of rapport as the other party
doesn’t feel heard, or thinks you have misunderstood)
So what do you need to do to make sure this works? (second
position, believe in the reframes yourself, make incremental
shifts in meaning rather than trying to leap from one set of
associations to its opposite in one go).
Variations
You could ask the whole group to shout out suggestions, or if you
have a little more time and want more participation get them to
do it in groups of 3-5.
Use this exercise for:
-Coaching Skills, -Counselling Skills, -Therapy Skills, -Influencing, -
Interpersonal Skills, -Customer Service, -Sales
Note: This exercise is an expansion of one in Sleight of Mouth: The Magic of Conversational Belief Change by Robert Dilts. Robert Dilts and his collaborators are responsible for many of the most widely-used patterns in NLP. His website is at www.nlpu.com
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 137 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
One-Word Reframing on the fly
Timing: 5 minutes per round plus clear up
Objectives:
• Gain practice in conversational one-word reframing in real
time
Procedure
Do the ‘One-Word Reframing’ exercise first.
Three participants - Explorer, Reframer, and Observer.
Explorer and Reframer have a conversation about something the
Explorer is interested in, or some mild problematic situation
he/she is experiencing.
Where appropriate, and maintaining rapport, Reframer uses one-
word reframing to lead Explorer in a more useful and resourceful
direction - minimising problem words, leading shifting ‘bad
qualities’ towards a more useful representation, and/or
amplifying motivation.
After 5 minutes, Observer reports on any behavioural signs of
state change in Explorer, any reframes that Observer noticed, and
generally what they observed about the progress of the
interaction between Explorer and Reframer.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 138 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Switch places until everyone has had a turn in each role.
Clear up
What did you notice?
Explorers - were you consciously aware of all the reframes that
your Observer noticed?
Reframers - were you consciously aware of all the reframes you
were doing?
How do you feel about using conversational reframing in future?
What will you notice that will tell you when you are getting really
good?
Use this exercise for:
-Coaching Skills, -Counselling Skills, -Therapy Skills, -Influencing, -
Interpersonal Skills, -Customer Service, -Sales
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 139 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Reframing Exercise
Timing: about 10 minutes
Objectives:
• Participants become skilled in formulating context and
meaning reframes and recognising when to use them.
Procedure:
Prior to the exercise, give some examples of context and meaning
reframes. Ask the group for some examples of complaints and
reframe them, asking whether your reframe is context or meaning
based.
As a group, individuals come up with examples of complaints.
Other group members come up with reframes and ask the rest of
the group if it is a context or meaning reframe.
Examples:
I'm always late for work.
"Isn't it great that you're so laid-back." (meaning)
"So you miss the traffic." (context)
Whenever the boss looks at me, I feel nervous.
"And isn't it great that he notices you – I've had bosses who didn't
realise I existed" (meaning)
I'm too soft.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 140 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
"And I'm sure your family and friends appreciate your warm and
trusting nature." (context)
There are some excellent examples in the book Reframing by
Bandler and Grinder. Note that some examples, like the first one
here, can be reframed using either context or meaning.
FAQ's
"Some of these examples are just silly, and wouldn't work in the
real world."
That's right - to use reframing skilfully, the reframe, whether
context or meaning, has to appeal to some value which is at least
as meaningful to the 'complainer' as the value behind their
complaint.
Use this exercise for:
-Coaching Skills, -Counselling Skills, -Therapy Skills, -Influencing
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 141 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Agreement Frame Exercise
Timing: 5 minutes (or less) plus clear-up
Objectives:
• Become more able to use ‘verbal aikido’ to reach agreement or
help people to change their minds
• Become more aware of when you use ‘but’ without meaning to
• Prepares for teaching Sleight of Mouth patterns or other
persuasion techniques
Procedure
In pairs. Introduce the Agreement Frame, using the Agreement
Frame handout.
Have the pairs find something that they disagree on, and have
them discuss it. Their challenge is to discuss the topic on which
they disagree without using the word “but”.
If a participant hears a “but” from the other person, they should
jump up, point at their partner and yell “SHE (or he) SAID ‘BUT’!”
As you demonstrate this, make the ‘but’ alarm so dramatic as to
be ridiculous. This will help to keep the exercise light-hearted.
Note: you may want to tailor the discussion topics to the degree
of rapport that the group have with each other. With people who
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 142 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
have already done a lot of NLP and are comfortable with other
people having different beliefs, you can allow them to choose
whatever topics they like (e.g. abortion, gun control, gay
marriage). On the first day of an entry-level course, or when
running reconciliation workshops between warring peoples, you
may want to ask them to choose something not quite so deeply
felt.
Clear up
How did that go? What did you learn?
What happened when you heard a different point of view
introduced with ‘and’ rather than ‘but’?
Note: I first encountered this exercise in workshops run by Doug O’Brien, a specialist in Sleight of Mouth patterns and Ericksonian Hypnosism (http://www.ericksonian.com). Recommended knowledge products by Doug O’Brien:
The User’s Guide To Sleight of Mouth
Belief Craft (with Jonathan Altfeld)
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 143 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Use this exercise for:
-Coaching Skills, -Counselling Skills, -Therapy Skills, -Influencing, -
Negotiation, -Team-Building, -Interpersonal Skills, -Customer
Service, -Sales, -Spiritual Development
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 144 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Generating Metaphors
Timing: 15-20 minutes plus clear up
Objectives:
• Practice chunking sideways by going up to higher level and
coming down somewhere else
• Practice devising and telling isomorphic metaphors
Procedure
Use the ‘Constructing a Metaphor’ handout. Two participants,
Explorer and Guide. Explorer tells Guide about some current
problem or situation in which more resources are needed.
Guide chunks up by asking themselves “What is this situation an
example of?”, then chunks down again by finding another
situation which is also an example of it.
Guide devises an empowering story around the second situation,
designed to evoke positive internal representations and help the
Explorer locate new resources. Establish "isomorphism" for all
significant nouns (things/people) and verbs (actions/processes) -
i.e. find elements in the story that match the elements in the
client’s situation.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 145 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Find new resources or ways of resolving the dilemma of the story,
so the story goes beyond the problem stage to a successful
conclusion.
Guide tells the story, paying close attention to any signs of the
Explorer changing state, and leaving the Explorer to find their
own meanings.
Guide gets feedback from the Explorer on what happened as they
heard the story.
Break state and swap roles.
Clear up
Explorers - what happened as you heard the story?
How do you feel about that situation now?
Guides - how easy was it to come up with a story?
Variation
Do the exercise as a trio, with two Guides collaborating on
constructing and/or telling the story (or one Guide can tell the
story while the other takes an Observer role).
Use this exercise for:
-Therapy Skills, -Influencing, -Presentation Skills
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 146 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Rep Systems and Eye
Accessing Cues
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 147 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Rep Systems: Generating Predicates
Timing: 10 minutes + clear up
Objectives:
• Familiarise students with the idea of rep systems
Procedure
Note: you can do this either before or after the Rep Systems
Preference Test, but definitely do it before the Rep Systems
Translation exercise.
Explain concept of Representational Systems and Predicates. Give
a couple of examples of predicates for each rep system.
Have students take 5 minutes to generate words and phrases for
each rep system. Have them share their results in pairs, or in a
small group, for another 5 minutes or less.
Clear up
Which system did you find it easiest to generate examples for?
Which (if any) was hardest?
Any that you weren't sure about? (in terms of which rep system
they fit into)
Be prepared for some phrases that mix rep systems without the
student having realised it - gently point these out.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 148 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Future pace: listen out for these sensory / rep system predicates in
future - from now on you'll see them coming, you'll hear them all
over the place, you'll run into them everywhere, there will be an
increase in your rate of predicate recognition...
Options
You can restrict the exercise to sensory systems (VAK) or you can
include Digital / Auditory Digital (Ad) as another rep system. If
you don't include Ad in the exercise, remember to introduce it
somewhere else!
You could also include the 'minor' rep systems - Olfactory and
Gustatory. The more systems you include, the more time you
need to allow.
Use this exercise for:
-Introduction to NLP, -Coaching Skills, -Therapy Skills, -
Influencing, -Sales
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 149 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Rep Systems Preference Test
Timing: 10 minutes + clear up
Objectives:
• Familiarise students with the idea of rep systems
• Stimulate discussion leading to greater self-awareness
Procedure
Once students are aware of the concept of representational
systems (including 'Auditory Digital'), hand out the Rep Systems
Preference Test (in Handouts) and ask them to fill it in. Also give
out the Scoring Your Rep System Preferences sheet.
Alternatively, use your own favourite representational systems
preference test. Emphasise that it's not a competition and there
are no overall 'high' or 'low' scores.
Some people will finish more quickly than others. Suggest that
they find someone else who has finished and compare their
results.
Clear up
Who scored highly on one rep system in particular?
Anyone score particularly low on one rep system compared to the
others?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 150 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Find out what people's rep system preferences are according to
the test.
Emphasise that this test has no scientific validity - it's just a
snapshot of the way that they have answered the questions at
this particular time. At another time, or in another context, they
might show a different preference.
In particular, caution them against labelling themselves or others
at the Identity level as "a visual" or whatever. People use all the
rep systems most of the time, and some people will be about
equal on all of them.
NLP is about increasing choice rather than reducing it - people
who say things like "I can't visualise, I'm a Kinaesthetic" have
missed the point of NLP (everyone can visualise, otherwise how
would they find their way home in the evenings and recognise
their families?)
This is also an opportunity to remind students that 'Auditory
Digital' (internal dialogue) is not a sensory system like the others,
but it is a representational system.
How would you spot someone's rep system preference (if they have
one) in conversation? Sensory words and phrases are known in
NLP as 'predicates'. At the same time, as John Grinder says, you
have to check in every 30 seconds or so to find out what rep
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 151 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
system they are currently using, rather than assuming that the
first one you hear is the one they use all the time.
Give out the Representational Systems and Sensory Specific
Phrases handouts.
FAQ - "How do I pay attention to someone's rep system as shown
up in their predicates, and at the same time stay aware of the
content of what they are saying?"
Generally, I trust my unconscious mind. Some books on NLP
would have you believe that everyone has a strong, obvious
preference for one rep system or another. In fact, most people
switch happily between rep systems depending on context, or use
all of them in combination.
There are only two situations where you really have to
consciously think about this: one is if you have a very strong
preference yourself - e.g. kinaesthetic. You will be able to
communicate better with a wider range of people, and sound
more interesting and vivid, if you practice thinking in other
modalities and introducing words from other sensory systems
into what you are saying.
The other situation is if you meet someone with a very strong
preference. You will notice this. If you meet someone with a very
strong visual preference, it will be blindingly obvious. If you are
talking to someone with a clear auditory preference, you will hear
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 152 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
it straight away. A strong kinaesthetic preference will jump out
and grab you! And if you encounter a personage with an auditory-
digital preference, your cognitive unconscious will immediately
register the data and communicate its diagnosis to your
attention...
So which predicates would you use in writing, where you don't
know if the recipient has a strong rep system preference?
A mixture of predicates from different rep systems. Your writing,
like your speech, will hold the attention more if you use sensory
rather than Ad words, because it's easier for the reader to make
vivid. internal representations from sensory language. It's also
more precise, because words without direct sensory referents,
particularly nominalisations, can mean different things to
different people or not mean very much at all (I recommend
George Orwell's short essay Politics and the English Language on
this topic - it has some interesting commonalities with NLP).
If you were speaking to an audience, where people will probably
have different preferences, which rep system would you use?
Again, a mixture, with a preference for sensory rather than
'digital' language unless you are talking about a specialised field
(e.g. law, science) which has its own Ad jargon.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 153 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Use this exercise for:
-Introduction to NLP, -Coaching Skills, -Therapy Skills, -
Influencing, -Sales
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 154 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Rep System Translation Exercise
Timing: about 15 minutes
Objectives
• Participants become more aware of rep systems and more
skilled in translating between them
Procedure
Handouts: Representational Systems and Sensory Specific
Phrases.
Individually (in writing) or as a group (verbally), participants
translate the following statements into a different rep system (my
suggestions in italics):
1. There's light at the end of the tunnel.
I'm feeling my way through it.
There are some more optimistic notes beginning to come
through.
2. I'm stuck between a rock and a hard place.
I can't see a way out.
There's nothing good to say about the situation.
I'm in the poo.
3. That really resonates with me.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 155 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
I see what you mean.
That gets me right here
Can't put my finger on it.
Nothing's springing to mind.
I don’t see it.
5. Brilliant!
Cool!
Sound! (this is actually a kinaesthetic one)
Rock'n'roll!
6. I can't hear myself think.
It's all a blur at the moment.
My head's full of cotton wool.
7. It's like a weight was taken from my shoulders.
It's like the sun suddenly came out.
Peace at last!
8. I smell a rat.
It's a bit off-colour.
I detect a false note.
9. He lit up like a Christmas tree.
He felt a rush.
Zing went the strings of his heart!
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 156 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
10. Certain actions were taken which after due consideration were
determined to have resulted in a sub-optimal outcome.
We f***ed up!
We dropped a clanger.
Use this exercise for:
-Introduction to NLP, -Coaching Skills, -Therapy Skills, -
Influencing, -Sales
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 157 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Representational System Exercise 1
Timing: 3 minutes + 2 minutes feedback per round
Objective:
• Participants develop their ability to track representational
systems in parallel with content
Procedure
Handouts: Representational Systems and Sensory Specific
Phrases.
Three participants: Speaker, Matcher and Observer.
Speaker has a conversation with Matcher about something that's
easy to talk about. Matcher (as well as doing normal non-verbal
matching) tracks content and rep systems used – tracking content
is the priority.
Observer tracks rep systems used by both participants and gives
feedback on the rep systems used, and on the matching of rep
systems, after each round.
Rotate until each participant has played each role.
Clear up
What did you notice?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 158 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
(to Matchers) How conscious were you of the rep systems used?
(to Observers) How much matching was going on?
Often the Matcher will have matched rep systems without being
fully aware of it.
FAQs
"I found it really hard to notice any words specific to a sensory
rep system."
So you're feeling stuck with this, like you can't get a handle on it?
Having a rough time? Maybe a sinking feeling? (and so in, using
kinaesthetic words, until they get it).
What rep system was I using there?
See, you saw the light pretty quickly there, I didn’t have to draw
you a diagram – I don't see a problem…
Usually people will use a mixture of rep systems – which means
that you can talk back to them using whatever your habitual
systems are and they will understand you easily. If someone is
leaning very heavily one rep system, you'll find that jumps out at
you and grabs you very powerfully. If auditory words are a
recurring theme in their conversation, that again will strike a
chord and ring the alarm bells loud and clear.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 159 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
And let's not overgeneralise and forget the auditory-digital system,
which is many people's primary mode of conceptualisation and
communication, especially in business…
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 160 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Representational System Exercise 2
Timing
5 minutes + 2 minutes feedback each round.
Objectives:
• Participants become skilled in matching and mismatching
representational systems
• Participants develop confidence in their abilities to do the
above
Procedure
Handouts: Representational Systems and Sensory Specific
Phrases.
Three participants: Speaker, Matcher and Observer.
Speaker has a conversation with Matcher about something that's
easy to talk about. Matcher (as well as doing normal non-verbal
matching throughout) first matches the speakers rep systems for
two minutes, then mismatches just the rep systems for two
minutes, then matches again for the final minute.
Observer tracks rep systems used by both participants and gives
feedback on the rep systems used, and on the matching and
mismatching of rep systems, after each round.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 161 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Rotate until each participant has played each role.
Clear up
What did you notice?
(to Speakers) How did you feel when you were mismatched?
(to Matchers) How easy was it?
FAQs
As for Rep System Exercise 1 above.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 162 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Rep System Storytelling Exercise
Timing
5 minutes.
Objective:
• Participants become more skilled in shifting gracefully from
one rep system to another, while keeping track of content
Procedure
Four or five participants
Stand or sit in a circle.
A starts of telling a story in Visual mode for two sentences. The
next person then continues the story with two sentences using
Auditory words, then the next person does two more in
Kinaesthetic. The next person continues the story with two more
sentences in Visual. With four people, you are now back to the
first person, who continues in Auditory, and so on. With five
people, the story will arrive back at the first person in Kinesthetic
mode.
Continue telling the story until each person has used Visual,
Auditory and Kinaesthetic - or until the story reaches a natural
punchline.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 163 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
When it gets too easy
• Add Auditory Digital to the storytelling modes (you will need 5
participants for this)
• Take it down to one sentence in each mode
A note on participant numbers: if you are using 3 rep systems,
you need four or 5 participants, so that the same person doesn't
get the same rep system twice. If you use four rep systems, you
need 3 or 5 participants. Note that 6 participants won't work, as
each participant will end up with the same one or two rep
systems.
Clear up
Which rep systems did you find easiest? Which were the hardest to
do?
If the story was describing an experience that majored in one sense
(e.g. a concert would be mostly auditory), what did you do when
you had to use other rep systems? (they could, for example, use
metaphor to describe a sensory experience in terms of another
sense - "a stirring melody that made my heart leap")
Use this exercise for:
-Storytelling
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 164 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Overlapping Rep Systems
Timing: 10 minutes per round + clear up
Objectives:
• Become more aware of your own most favoured and least
favoured representational systems
• Become more skilled at leading someone into an altered state
by overlapping rep systems
Procedure
Optionally, demo this first.
In pairs. Notice your most preferred rep system (from VAK), and
your least preferred, and tell your partner.
Find out a typical activity that your partner likes doing (e.g.
walking along a beach, driving a car). Take a few moments to
devise a description of this activity that starts with your partner's
most favoured rep system, continues through the next most
favoured, and ends up with the least favoured.
Example describing walking along a beach for a person with a
most preferred rep system of kinaesthetic and a least preferred of
visual: “As you walk along you can feel the warmth of the sun and
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 165 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
the sand between your toes. You can feel and hear it crunching
beneath your feet, almost drowned out by the noise of the surf
and the cries of the seabirds. If you were to turn towards that
sound, you might notice the sparkle of the sunlight on the
waves…”
Play this back to your partner using a soothing, hypnotic tonality.
Notice what happens. Swap roles.
Clear up
Listeners - what happened as you heard the activity described to
you in overlapping rep systems? What happened in your subjective
experience? (expect the least favoured rep system to be easier to
access than usual, and possibly a sense of 'altered state' from
some participants)
'Overlappers' - how easy was it to overlap from one rep system to
another? (it's easier if you relax and just do it, rather than
agonising over 'getting it right')
What would make it easier? (practice)
What changes did you notice in your partner as you played back
their experience to them? (any signs of altered state)
Notice that if someone has a preferred rep system of visual, and
you lead them into processing in kinaesthetic or auditory mode,
they are in something of an altered state from normal - so
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 166 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
overlapping rep systems can be used as a form of trance
induction. Duane Lakin, in 'The Unfair Advantage: Practical
Applications of NLP for Sales and Marketing', recommends
answering objections in a different rep system from the one they
are couched in.
How will you use overlapping rep systems in the future?
Use this exercise for:
-Hypnosis
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 167 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Generating Rep System Questions
Timing: 20 minutes
Objectives:
• Become more aware of the impact of language on the internal
representations of the listener
• Become more aware of the possibility of differences in maps
of the world leading to unexpected results
• Specifically, to embed the idea of V (remembered and
constructed), A (remembered and constructed), K, and Ad
• (Covert) Generate questions for use in Eye Accessing Cues
Elicitation exercise that follows
Procedure
Make students aware of the above representational modes. Ask
them as an experiment to generate, write down and try out
questions designed to take someone into one or other of these
modes as they process it, e.g.
Vr (VISUAL RECALL)
"What colour is the front door where you work?"
"How many windows does your place have?"
Vc (VISUAL CONSTRUCT)
"If the Owl and the Pussycat had kids, what would they look like?"
"What would your bedroom look like if it was painted silver?"
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 168 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Ar (AUDITORY RECALL)
"What was the very last thing I said?"
"What does Donald Duck's voice sound like?"
Ac (AUDITORY CONSTRUCT)
'If tigers spoke English, what would they sound like?'
'What would your favourite song sound like, if it was sung by a
coyote?'
K (KINAESTHETIC)
"What does velvet feel like?"
"How warm do you like your bath?"
Ad (AUDITORY DIGITAL - INTERNAL VOICE)
"Can you recite the seven times table to yourself?"
"What's your favourite proverb or saying?"
Generate as many questions as you can for 10 minutes, then try
them out on each other for 10 minutes.
Clear up
What did you notice?
Did the questions have the effect you expected when you tried
them out?
Keep the questions for the next exercise.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 169 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Eliciting Eye Accessing Cues
Timing: 15 minutes
Objectives:
• Become familiar with eye accessing cues
• Introduce concepts of Lead, Primary and Reference rep
systems
Procedure
This exercise needs volunteers who are 'normally wired' as
regards eye accessing cues. Ideally, you will already have marked
out some students in whom the eye accessing cues are highly
visible. At the very least, make sure your volunteers are right
handed (unless you have spotted someone who is left handed but
'normally wired').
This needs one volunteer for every six or so students.
Get each volunteer to stand in front of their group of six. Place
the standard 'eye accessing cues' wallchart behind the volunteer.
Students ask them questions generated in the previous '
Generating Representational System Questions' exercise, and
observe the direction of their eye movements in response to the
questions. The volunteer does not have to answer questions out
loud.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 170 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Continue until students have observed the eye accessing cues.
If the volunteer is up for it, you could video their responses.
As the trainer, look out for accessing cues indicating Lead and
Reference rep systems.
Clear up
What did you observe?
What to expect: often the eye accessing cues are by no means
obvious. This could be for a number of reasons:
1. The subject may be accessing a different rep system from
the one you would expect from the question. For example, if
you ask them 'What colour is the front door where you
work?' they may be seeing a memory of the door in the
context of the workplace frontage, as you would expect from
the question - or they may be seeing the door just floating
there on its own, which could be a constructed image, since
they have never seen it that way in real life.
2. The subject may access their Lead rep system first, to
retrieve the memory, before processing it in the system that
the question would point to. To answer 'What does a parrot
sound like?', the subject may momentarily flash into their
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 171 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Lead rep system to retrieve a visual image of a parrot, in
order to access the Auditory remembered sound.
3. After retrieving an image, sound or feeling in response to
the question, the subject may go into their Reference system
(e.g. Kinaesthetic) to check that their answer feels right.
4. The subject's thought processes move quickly, and they
rapidly move on to some other thought which may be
attended by more obvious eye accessing movements, or
movements of longer duration, than those that came from
answering the question.
Also be aware that if students have read up on criticisms of NLP
before coming on the course, they may be skeptical about eye
accessing cues, since this is where critics of NLP have mostly
focused their attacks. It's worth being aware of the flaws in the
design of experiments which have furnished the 'evidence' on
which these criticisms are based - ably exposed in an article by
Andy Bradbury at:
http://www.bradburyac.mistral.co.uk/nlpfax09.htm
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 172 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Emotional Awareness With Eye
Accessing Cues
Timing: 2 minutes
Objectives:
• Participants gain a way of becoming more (or less) aware of
their own emotions
• Reminds students of eye accessing cues
This exercise could form a lead-in to learning eye accessing cues,
or form part of exploring the concept.
Procedure
Guide the whole class through this, or let them explore in pairs.
Step 1: Check how you are feeling emotionally right now. Check
for quality (what the emotion is) and intensity (how strongly you
feel it).
Step 2: Look down towards your ‘feeling’ side (as previously
established when learning about eye accessing cues, or towards
the dominant hand if you haven't covered this yet) and again
check how you feel.
Step 3: What differences do you notice in quality and/or
intensity? Has the feeling changed?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 173 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Clear up
Really Step 3 above is the main clear up. Further questions will
depend on the group's responses. It's always worth asking after
any exercise "What are you going to do differently as a result of
what you've learned?"
Use this exercise for:
-Emotional Intelligence
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 174 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Preferred Sensory System for Love
Timing: 5 minutes + clear up
Objectives:
• Provides a memorable example of concept of sensory systems
• Increases self-awareness around relationships
• Adds some movement to a study session
Procedure
Clear the chairs away of necessary. ‘Draw’ an imaginary triangle
on the floor of the classroom. One corner is Visual, one is
Auditory, one is Kinaesthetic.
Ask the group to stand up and ask them:
How do you know when you are loved? Is it the way that special
someone looks at you? Or the particular tone of voice they use to
tell you? Or is it a special touch? Which one, or more, of these
really lets you know when you are loved?
Ask them to stand at the place in the triangle which represents
how important each type of information is to them - if it’s all
about the look, stand at the Visual corner; if all three senses are
equally important, stand in the centre of the triangle.
Clear up
Are you where you would expect?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 175 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
How about other people?
Who would you want to be aware of this information about you,
and how are you going to let them know it? What difference will it
make when they know?
What are you going to do differently now?
Use this exercise for:
-Emotional Intelligence, -Dealing With Difficult People,
-Introduction to NLP, -Interpersonal Skills
Note: This exercise is based on one by Richard Bolstad and Margot Hamblett in their book Transforming Communication (available direct from Richard's website at www.transformations.net.nz).
V
A K
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 176 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Submodality Exercises
All the things that go on in your mind affect you,
and they’re all potentially within your control
- Richard Bandler, Using Your Brain for a Change
“
”
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 177 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Bad Experience / Good Experience
Exercise
Timing: about 10 minutes with clear-up
Objectives:
• Participants experience the difference that submodalities make
to emotional response
• Participants feel more empowered to "run their own brains"
• Participants understand more fully that the structure of
experience is more important than content
Procedure
Trainer leads this exercise.
(Warning: for the ‘bad experience’, choose something no higher
than about 6 on the scale of 1 to 10)
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 178 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
"Script" Comments
Think of a bad experience you've had. Presupposes they've
had one.
As you picture it:
• How big is it?
• Whereabouts is it in your perceptual space –
point to it.
• Is it colour or black and white?
• Moving or still?
• 3D or flat?
• Is your point of view inside the picture as if
you're there, or outside the picture so you
can see yourself in there?
"Forcing" a visual
Elicit submodalities
(do this quickly, not
giving them time to
'make it up')
How do you feel as you look at it?
We expect a bad
feeling here
Now step out of the picture – make it flat –
freeze-frame it – make it black and white –
make it smaller and dimmer. How do you feel
now?
Check their
responses – the bad
feeling should be
less intense
Notice which change made the biggest
difference
Now think of a good experience – you can
make this as intense as you want!
Note the embedded
suggestion
continues next page
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 179 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
As you picture it:
• How big is it?
• Whereabouts is it in your perceptual space –
point to it.
• Is it colour or black and white?
• Moving or still?
• 3D or flat?
• Is your point of view inside the picture as if
you're there, or outside the picture so you
can see yourself in there?
Do this fast, as
before
As you look at it, how do you feel? We expect good
Now make it life-size!
Make the colour more intense!
Put some movement in there!
Make it 3D!
And step into it, if you haven't already.
What does it sound like?
The sound is a bit
of a cheat as it's
not a visual
submodality
How do you feel now? The good feeling
should be more
intense
What changes made the most difference?
So notice that we're not changing the content
of the experience, just the qualities of how you
represent it
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 180 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Clear up
"I'm not good at visualising."
It's OK, you can just pretend. You may be better at feeling the good
experience, hearing what it sounded like, or even describing it in
words.
We use the visual modality as our first choice because it works for
most people and it's quicker and easier – you can do it with
auditory and kinaesthetic as well, it just takes a bit longer.
So how might you use this?
(Dissociate and turn down submodalities to defuse bad
memories, mentally rehearse what might go wrong e.g. in a
presentation.
Associate and turn up submodalities to increase enjoyment of
good memories and increase motivation to achieve future goals)
Use this exercise for:
-Introduction to NLP, -Goal Setting, -Motivation, -Stress
Management, -Therapy Skills
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 181 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Compulsion to Indifference Exercise
Timing: 5 minutes per round
Objectives:
• Participants understand power of submodalities in changing
attitudes to things or situations
• Participants acquire a quick and easy "convincer" exercise they
can use with clients
Procedure
Demo this first. Use the ‘Basic Submodalities Change - Mapping
Across’ handout.
A good example to use is a food that the client "likes too much"
(present state) which can be shifted into the submodalities of a
food that is disgusting to them (desired state). Other possibilities
– an unresourceful state (e.g. confusion) to a resourceful one (e.g.
calm curiosity).
1. Identify the two states (or values/beliefs) that you want to
contrast — one desired, one undesired. E.g. a 'tempting' food
and a 'disgusting' food. Check that it's OK with the person to
not like the tempting food ever again.
2. Elicit the submodalities of each separately. Force a visual
representation and get the submodalities quickly.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 182 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
"Where do you see the chocolate? Is it big or small? Life size or
bigger (or smaller)?…" etc
3. “Contrastive Analysis”. Identify the Drivers - the critical
submodalities which make the difference between the two.
(Usually it is good to go for the following as critical: location,
distance, associated/dissociated, brightness, or focus.)
4. Let go of the content of the desired state, creating a void.
Change the submodalities of the present state to those of the
desired state. Emphasise the drivers. You can leave the content
of the present state as it is, although this may change by itself.
5. Test the change using the internal kinaesthetic experience (e.g.
"Does this feel like understanding now?") and future pace.
Have the students try this in pairs – then swap round.
Clear-Up
What did you notice? Which submodalities made the difference for
you?
Often smell is the driver – a bit of a cheat but if the client comes
up with it, use it!
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 183 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Submodality Belief Change
Timing: 15 minutes per round + clear up
Objectives:
• Gain experience using submodalities
• Underlines principle of getting results by working with
structure not content
• Let go of a limiting belief
• Gain a way of helping others to let go of limiting beliefs
Procedure
In threes - Explorer, Guide, Observer.
To be done after simpler submodality exercises like ‘Bad
Experience/Good Experience’ and ‘Amplifying Motivation’. In
particular, do this as the next exercise after ‘Compulsion to
Indifference’, since this is essentially an extension of that exercise
which does a similar process twice - once to take the power out of
a limiting belief, the second time to strengthen a replacement
desired belief.
Students should have the ‘Submodalities’ and ‘Submodality Belief
Change’ handouts.
Remind the group that beliefs are arbitrary linkages between
events, things and concepts made by our minds, based on our
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 184 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
existing mental filters and becoming additional mental filters in
themselves. Also remind them of the psychological concept of
‘Confirmation Bias’ - that we tend to filter out evidence that
contradicts our beliefs, while amplifying evidence that confirms
them. Beliefs are therefore not the same as ‘reality’, although they
feel real to us because they create their own evidence and become
self-fulfilling prophesies.
You may want to demo the process first, although if the students
have just done the ‘Compulsion to Indifference’ exercise it should
be enough to point out that the process is essentially the same
exercise done twice.
Have groups of Explorer, Guide and Observer work through the
process using the ‘Submodality Belief Change’ handout, taking
each role in turn. Have the Observers give a couple of minutes
sensory-based, non-evaluative feedback at the end of each round.
Clear Up
What did you notice?
What were the drivers?
If anyone says it didn’t work, find out how fast they were doing
the elicitation (sometimes novices do it too slowly). Other
possibilities - the submodalities of the new belief were not made
sufficiently compelling, or there was an ecology issue around
letting go of the new belief or adopting the old one.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 185 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
What are you going to do differently in future? (answers could be
about how people are going to act now they are free from their
limiting belief, or about how they are going to use the method to
help clients, family, or themselves).
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 186 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Unconfident/Confident State Differences
Timings: 10 minutes per round
Objectives
• Participants become more aware of submodality differences
between two opposed states
• Participants evoke their 'observing self' - always helpful for
personal development
• Participants become more confident in a given context
Procedure
Two participants, Explorer and Coach (can add a third Observer)
Coach asks Explorer to identify a situation in which they feel less
confident than they would like. Coach elicits the kinaesthetic
submodalities of this 'unconfident' state, starting with location in
the body. (optionally - what words come to mind as you
experience this state?)
Break state.
Coach asks Explorer about the kinaesthetic submodalities of
confidence, starting with what does it feel like and where do you
feel it? (optionally - what words come to mind as you experience
this state?)
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 187 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Make sure that 'confidence' is experienced more strongly than
'unconfidence' - find other resources states in that location if
needed.
Coach asks Explorer to be aware of both locations simultaneously
- what happens as you move your attention from the
'unconfident' location to the 'confident' location? Pause, then
start again at 'unconfident' and move to 'confident'. The aim is to
set up a pathway that automatically moves from 'unconfident' to
'confident' - or at least have the Explorer know what they need to
do to move from one to the other.
Switch roles.
Clear Up
What happened as you became aware of both locations at the
same time?
What happened as you moved from 'unconfident' to 'confident'?
What to expect
Often the 'unconfident' state will become weaker, or start to take
on some of the characteristics of 'confident'.
Use this exercise for:
-Introduction to NLP, -Confidence, -Self-Esteem, -Therapy Skills
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 188 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Dealing With A Critical Inner Voice
Timing: About 10 minutes with clear-up
Objectives:
• Experience using auditory submodalities
• Take control of the "inner critic"
Procedure
Trainer leads the whole group. Make sure to return the inner
voice to its starting point after each change, to identify which
changes made the most difference.
Who often has some internal dialogue or commentary? (usually
most people will) The rest of you are saying to yourself, "Internal
dialogue? What's he on about?"
Those of you who can't hear it, you can just smile during this
next exercise – and I want you to observe your fellow participants
closely.
Is that voice ever critical?
Notice where the voice is coming from (inside or outside your
body, and whereabouts), the tone, volume, and pitch. Notice how
you feel when you pay attention to it.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 189 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Would the voice still have the same effect if it came from your
left big toe? (the client has to try the new location out in order to
answer the question)
Return the voice to its original location – we are only going to
alter one variable at a time.
What effect would it have if it said the same things, but in the
style of Donald Duck?
If you turned the volume up, if you turned it down (or off), if it
was very high pitched, very deep, very fast, or very slow, if it used
a humorous tone, or a loving tone… (try these out one by one,
putting them back each time - NB some changes might make
things worse, so change them back at once if they do).
Clear up
Which submodality change had the most positive effect for you?
Keep the changes that work best for you.
Use this exercise for:
-Introduction to NLP, -Stress Management, -Therapy Skills, -
Coaching Skills, -Self-Esteem, -Confidence
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 190 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Amplifying Motivation
Time: 5 minutes (10 with pairs, 15 with trios)
Objectives:
• Participants experience power of submodalities to amplify
emotional response
• Participants understand importance of having dissociated
picture of goal
• Participants amplify their own motivation
Procedure
Do this with trainer taking whole group through exercise, or
demo it and have the group do it in pairs, trios – depending on
how much time you have.
1. Think of a goal you have and notice how
you feel as you look at it.
Forces a visual.
2. Elicit submodalities Do this quickly
3. Amplify submodalities, checking what
happens to the emotional response after
each one:
Make it bigger – notice what happens to
your emotional response
Make colour more intense
Do this quite
quickly too.
usually life-size is
best – bigger may
make it "not real"
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 191 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Make it clearer
Put some movement into it
Make it 3D (if flat to start with)
Step into it (if dissociated to start with)
Notice what it sounds like
Notice what you feel – turn up those
good feelings
if still to start with
if flat to start with
if not already
there
state change
should be visible
4 Now step out of it – because you're not
there yet!
Unconscious mind doesn't distinguish
between 'reality' and imagination – if you
stayed associated into the image it would
feel like you were already there, so you
could just spend your life daydreaming.
With a dissociated vision, you know you
want to get there, and you have to do
something to make it happen.
Clear-up
What did you notice?
What change made the biggest difference?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 192 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Note that since everyone has a different map of the world, the
occasional participant may find that changing a particular
submodality may not have the result you expect - for example,
they might feel less intensely about their goal when they step into
it than when viewing it from outside. Also, turning up a
submodality too far may go over a threshold that reduces
motivation - for example, making the colours of an image too
garish and saturated may make it feel unrealistic.
Variation
If doing this exercise with an audience who have not had the
opportunity to prepare a well-formed goal, you may prefer to do
this exercise with the image of a good memory instead. Just omit
the 'stepping out' in step 4, as maximising the good feelings from
the memory rather than motivation is the aim in this case.
Use this exercise for:
-Introduction to NLP, -Goal Setting, -Motivation, -Stress
Management, -Coaching Skills, -Therapy Skills
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 193 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Swish Pattern
Timing: 10 minutes per round (inc feedback)
Objectives:
• Participants can use visual Swish pattern to defuse negative
triggers
• Participants get to have one of their own negative triggers
defused
Procedure
Demo this with volunteer. Do the Swish pattern (as in the manual)
to defuse a visual trigger for an emotional response (e.g. the sight
of a particular person, or a particular facial expression, or going
in to a particular office). This can also be done for a habit (e.g.
being offered a cigarette).
Ensure that students know that trigger image should be
associated (because that's how they will see it next time it
happens in real life) while "good" image of self as they want to be
should be dissociated (builds motivation to get there).
Ensure submodalities of desired image are powerful and
compelling (calibrate the emotional response of demo subject
when they have built it).
Have students do the Swish in pairs (or threes if there is time).
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 194 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Clear-up
The most common reason for it not working is because the
desired image is not compelling enough.
Either size or distance is usually the driver submodality.
Visual swishes are the easiest to do – it is possible to do auditory,
kinaesthetic and even olfactory swishes but visual is easiest.
Use this exercise for:
-Introduction to NLP, -Stress Management, -Therapy Skills, -
Confidence
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 195 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Re-Contextualising Bad Experiences
Timing: 10 minutes per round
Objectives:
• Participants understand power of submodalities and how
context changes meaning
• Participants 'defuse' a bad experience
Procedure
Two participants - Explorer and Coach
Coach asks Explorer to identify an experience that is somewhat
uncomfortable - a 4 or 5 on the 'Richter Scale' of unpleasantness,
rather than a 9.
Coach asks Explorer to identify four good, resourceful
experiences and to arrange the visual representations of these
experiences (whatever Explorer sees when looking at each
experience) in a quadrant:
1
2
3
4
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 196 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Make sure the pictures have strong submodalities (big, bright,
colourful, perhaps moving).
Now place the uncomfortable experience with weaker
submodalities (smaller, darker, less colourful, still) in the centre
of the good experiences, so they frame it.
What is different about the experience that you identified as
uncomfortable now?
Clear up
Explorer - what happened when you surrounded the 'bad'
experience with more powerful resource experience?
Coach (or Observer if present) - what did you observe at each step?
What are you going to do differently as a result of what you have
learned?
Note: This exercise is based on my (possibly imperfect)
recollection of one devised by John McWhirter
www.sensorysystems.co.uk
1
2
3
4
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 197 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Use this exercise for:
-Stress Management, -Therapy Skills, -Self-Esteem, -Confidence
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 198 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
The Confidence Chorus
Timing: 10 minutes per round
Objectives:
• Participants boost their self-esteem and confidence
• Participants gain a better understanding of the power of
auditory submodalities, particularly location
Procedure
2 participants - Explorer and Coach (optionally, add an Observer)
Explorer identifies an upcoming situation where they are not as
resourceful as they would like to be (e.g. job interview,
presentation, best man's speech, court appearance). If no suitable
situation comes to mind, ask what the Explorer would really like
to do but has not dared to so far.
Briefly associate into the experience - enough to get a feel for it
and rate it on a 1-10 scale of intensity.
Coach guides Explorer to imagine being 'backed up' by two sets of
people. The 'inner circle' is made up of four people who love
them, or who are close friends. The 'outer circle' is four people (or
more) who respect them and are well disposed towards them.
The 'inner circle' are arranged one at each shoulder of the
Explorer, and two behind. The 'outer circle' are just beyond that.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 199 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Explorer imagines each person in the inner and outer circles
saying supportive things that convey a belief in the Explorer's
ability to succeed in the coming challenge. Experiment with the
auditory submodalities of each voice to give the maximum feeling
of confidence to the Explorer.
(Optionally - experiment with the optimum distances from the
Explorer of the inner and outer circle).
Now turn the voices down so that the Explorer can pay full
attention to the challenge, but still knows that the supporters are
'there' and so still feels supported.
As a future pace: what will be different now when you are in that
situation for real? Ask what the Explorer needs to do in order to
have these supporters available when needed in the future (ie
have them self-anchor the experience). Break state and test.
Clear up
What did you notice?
Explorers - what element of that procedure made the real
difference for you?
Use this exercise for:
-Stress Management, -Therapy Skills, -Self-Esteem, -Confidence
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 200 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
New Behaviour Generator
Timing: 10 minutes max per round
Prerequisites
Participants are familiar with eye accessing cues and
submodalities. For certain of the refinements, they would need
familiarity with the basic concept of a timeline, chunking, or
communicating with the unconscious mind.
Objectives:
• Participants practice an effective method of 'mental rehearsal',
learning from past mistakes, utilising resources from other
contexts, and learning from role models
What to say beforehand (Whys)
We know from sports psychology that mental rehearsal makes
success more likely - here's a way to do it effectively, and to be
able to learn not just from role models but from past mistakes.
Procedure
Two participants - 'Experiencer' and 'Guide'
No need to demo this. Guide coaches the Experiencer through the
following process:
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 201 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
1. Describe a behaviour you would like to be able to do, or how
you would like to be able to do something better. Start from a
belief and internal dialogue of 'I can do this'.
2. Go into Vc and create a movie of yourself doing the new
behaviour the way you want. Add sound so that you see and
hear yourself. Adjust the movie until you are satisfied with the
new behaviour.
3. Step into the 'movie' and check how this feels (K). Make any
further adjustments you need to until you feel the way you
want.
4. Future pace extensively – see yourself using the new behaviour
in 3 or more opportunities in the future to generalise the new
ability out.
Refinements:
Use a role model: In steps 2 and 3 you can use a 'role model' who
you know can do the desired behaviour well. Run a movie of that
person performing the behaviour (Step 2) and then 'become' that
person in Step 3. Then repeat Steps 2 and 3 with yourself in the
movie, making any changes you need to.
Use resources from your past: if you have dealt with similar
situations well in the past, see yourself doing that (Vr) and then
transfer that skill into the new situation (Vc).
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 202 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Chunk the behaviour down: if you need to, chunk the desired
behaviour down into smaller steps and run through Steps 2 and 3
on each.
Use a timeline: lay a timeline out on the floor. See yourself
enjoying the results of the desired behaviour and place this goal
on the timeline. Step into it, get the good feelings, and notice the
steps and any new behaviours associated with them leading up to
the successful achievement of this goal.
Step off the timeline and notice where each new behaviour step is
on the timeline. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for each new behaviour.
Finally walk up the timeline from now, associating into each step,
until you reach your goal. Store your goal and the new behaviours
associated with it wherever feels right for you.
Create alternatives: at Step 2 ask your unconscious mind to
create at least 3 options for new behaviours. Try out each and
select the most appropriate.
Clear up
How did it go?
What happened at each stage?
What made the most difference for you?
What did your guide do or say that was particularly helpful?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 203 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Anchoring and
Eliciting States
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 204 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
State Elicitation Exercise
Timing: 5 minutes brainstorm/explanation + 5 minutes per
round
Objectives:
• Become more aware of what works in eliciting states
• Lays the groundwork for anchoring exercises
• Practice calibration
Procedure
With the group, brainstorm different ways of helping someone to
change state. Fill in any important ways that the group has
missed.
Then: In pairs - Explorer and Guide (could be in 3s with the
addition of Observer).
Explorer chooses a state that they would like to go into. Guide
uses any methods they choose to help the Explorer reach the
chosen state. When the Explorer gets there: switch round.
Clear up
Explorers: how did that go?
What did your Guide do that was most helpful in reaching the
state?
Guides: how did you know that your Explorer was getting nearer?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 205 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
(Optional) Observers: what did you notice?
All: what are you going to do differently in future?
Use this exercise for:
-Introduction to NLP, -Stress Management, -Coaching Skills, -
Counselling Skills, -Therapy Skills, -Self-Esteem, -Confidence, -
Management, -Emotional Intelligence
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 206 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Self-Anchoring
Timing: 5 minutes
Objective:
! Participants build a resource anchor for themselves and gain a
process they can teach to clients
Procedure (Do this with whole group)
1. "Select a problem situation where you would like to behave
more resourcefully. What is the event that tells you that you
are in that type of situation? Notice how you have normally felt
in that situation and what usually happens."
2. "Now step out of that and choose a resource you would like to
have more of in that situation – it might be courage,
perseverance, energy, humour – whatever is most useful."
3. Elicit the state (get into powerful resourceful state yourself):
"What is it like when you feel like that? How do you know that
you are in that state? When have you been like that? Maybe
there's one specific time…. when was that? Where were you?
What were you doing? Who else was there? What did you see,
hear, feel? Are you in that state now?"
NB this is much better than "Can you remember a time when
you had <resource>?" – if they are not feeling very resourceful
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 207 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
when you ask the question, the chances are they won't
remember it.
4. Select anchors: "I want you to choose an image and a word or
phrase that you can use as an anchor for that state whenever
you need it. Also a physical gesture – something unobtrusive
that you can use anywhere is best.
5. Condition anchors: "Now I want you to go back to that
resourceful memory again – really feel it - and when you feel
the resourceful state is near its peak, see the image, say the
word to yourself and physically make the gesture."
6. Break state: "Now step out of that memory and come back to
'normal'." Make sure they are back – distract them if necessary.
7. Test the anchor: "Now imagine you're about to go through that
'problem' situation again – this time as soon as you notice the
'trigger' event, see that image, say the word to yourself and
physically make the gesture. Notice what's different this time."
Clear-up
Which anchor worked best for you?
Use this exercise for:
-Introduction to NLP, -Stress Management, -Therapy Skills, -Self-
Esteem, -Confidence
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 208 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Eliciting Powerful Positive States
Timing: About 5 minutes for the demo, and 5 minutes per
round.
Objectives:
! Participants know how to elicit states successfully
! Participants get into more positive state themselves
Procedure
Demo this first and then have participants try it in pairs. Key
concept is 'state dependent memory' – if they are far from the
desired state to start with, some people can't easily remember
previous times when they had it.
1. Choose powerful, high-energy positive state to evoke – e.g.
ecstatically happy.
2. Identify how they feel now (e.g. calm, a bit flat).
3. Lead them gradually into the state by taking on that state
yourself.
"Think of a time when you felt just OK." (Make sure they get
into it)
"Now think of a time when you felt pretty good and happy."
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 209 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
"Now a time when you felt better than that – really happy in
fact."
"And now a time when you felt even better than that -
absolutely ecstatically happy!"
"And you can anchor that for yourself."
Ask participants in pairs to lead their partners through a similar
process, evoking whatever powerful, high-energy resource state
the partners choose. They should remember to get into the state
themselves.
Clear-up
What do I need to know? What do you want to ask?
Use this exercise for:
-Introduction to NLP, -Coaching Skills, -Therapy Skills, -
Presentation Skills, -Leadership
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 210 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Circle of Excellence
Timing: 10 minutes per round
Objectives:
! Participants experience and practise Circle of Excellence and
stacking resource anchors
! Participants gain a powerful resource anchor
Procedure
Demo this first. This is best done when group is already feeling
good. Use the ‘Circle of Excellence’ handout.
Do this in pairs (Explorer, Guide). Ideally, if you have time, add
Observer.
1. Identify an excellent state that you want to have more of.
2. Think of a future situation (dissociated) where it would be
useful to have that excellent state. Then break state.
3. Set up a circle of excellence on the floor. What colour is it?
How big?
4. Access the excellent state and associate it with the circle.
What does it feel like when you are in that state?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 211 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Remember a time when you were in that state.
As soon as you start to feel that state, step into the circle.
Fully access the state.
5. Step back out of the circle and break state.
6. Test by stepping back into the circle. The excellent state should
return. Step back out again.
7. Is that strong enough for when you need it? (if not, repeat the
process with more resource states (make sure they are
compatible with each other) or more examples of the same
resource state, and ‘stack’ them in the circle).
8. Chaining
Remember that “problem” situation?
What will let you know it’s time to have these resources
available?
Imagine you’re in that “problem” situation now, and step into
the circle as soon as you start to access the “problem” state
again.
8. Testing
Step back out of the circle.
Access the “problem” state – perhaps by talking about it.
What happens now when you think of what used to go
wrong?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 212 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
The problem state should only appear briefly and lead
directly to the excellent state.
Clear up
What did you learn? What’s different now? How are you going to
use this?
If it didn’t work as well as expected, check that the Explorer was
in a sufficiently intense state, that they stepped into the circle at
the right time (ie as their state was changing up, not after it has
peaked), and that enough resource states were stacked.
Use this exercise for:
-Introduction to NLP, -Stress Management, -Confidence, -Self-
Esteem
Note: this is a simplified version of the Circle of Excellence process developed by John Grinder (www.johngrinder.com) and Judith DeLozier (www.nlpu.com). For the full description of the process (a bit complicated for an intro course but fine for NLP Practitioner training) see The Encyclopedia of Systemic NLP and NLP New Coding
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 213 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Collapsing a Negative Anchor
Timing: 15 minutes per round (pairs or trios)
Objectives:
• Participants learn the process and get one of their negative
anchors collapsed
Procedure
Demo this first. As ever with anchoring, get into the positive state
yourself when anchoring it.
1. Set the frame (i.e. explain what you’re going to do, get client’s
permission to touch them – obviously the students know about
anchoring so this is modeling what the students should do
with a real client)
2. Decide on which negative state is to be blown out
3. Decide on which positive/resource state is needed (high-
energy)
4. Get into specific positive state you’re eliciting
5. Make sure that the person is in a fully associated, intense,
congruent state
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 214 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
6. Anchor the positive state by touching some "neutral" part of
the client – knuckles are good (go on to stack more positive
states if you need to. You can ask the client “Is that strong
enough to get rid of <negative state>)?
7. Break state before you elicit the negative state.
8. Elicit and anchor the negative state on another knuckle (only
elicit the negative state as far as you need to anchor it)
9. Fire anchors at the same time until they peak, and the
integration is complete
10. Release the negative anchor
11. Hold the positive anchor for 5 more seconds and then
release
12. Test (by trying to fire the negative anchor, then by asking
about when the negative state used to occur).
Clear up
What do you want to ask? What do I need to know?
(If it didn't work, usually it's because the positive states weren't
intense enough)
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 215 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
New Orleans Flexibility Drill
Prerequisites
This exercise assumes that participants can set and stack
effective anchors.
Timing: around 25 minutes per round
Objectives:
• Participants practice anchoring
• Participants effectively dissolve an unresourceful response to
a particular stimulus
• Participants gain additional behavioural flexibility through
role-play
Procedure
Three participants:
• Explorer
• Coach
• Role-player (or 'actor', or 'annoyance')
1. Explorer identifies an external stimulus (a person, place, thing,
event, or any combination) that for them consistently triggers
an unresourceful state.
2. Coach anchors Explorer with the resources to successfully
handle the situation identified in Step 1, stacking several
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 216 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
resource states on the same anchor if needed. B tests the
anchor.
3. Explorer provides a detailed description of the scenario
identified in Step 1 and coaches Role-player in the specific
behaviours needed to accurately reproduce the external
stimulus. (Note that the term ‘role play’ implies using verbal
and nonverbal language patterns to re-create the external
stimulus, even if there was no other human involved.)
4. Coach triggers Explorer’s stacked resource anchor as Role-
player begins to role-play external stimulus. As Role-player
continues, Coach intermittently releases Explorers’s anchor,
calibrating Explorer’s state. Any time that Explorer begins to
revert to an unresourceful state, Coach reapplies the anchor.
Continue this process until Explorer remains completely
resourceful without needing the anchor to be triggered.
Clear up
What did you learn?
Role-players - how easy was it to role-play the stimulus?
(difficulties, feeling uncomfortable, etc, can be framed as useful
information for the role-player).
This is an adaptation of an exercise found in Tad James' NLP Practitioner
manual (1997) www.nlpcoaching.com
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 217 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Walking The Energy Scale
Timing: About 5 minutes per round (pairs)
Objectives:
! Participants are aware of sliding anchors
! Participants have useful energy-boosting technique, for
themselves and clients
Procedure
Demo this first.
1. Ask for a volunteer who would like to have more energy right
now.
2. Ask them how they would rate their energy level on a scale of 1
to 10, where one is very low and ten is as high as it can go.
3. Ask them to lay out their "energy scale" as a line on the floor –
it needs to be at least 6 feet long.
4. Ask them to step on to the scale at whatever number they are
at now.
5. Ask them where they would like to be (ie a number – asking
"where" reinforces the spatial metaphor).
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 218 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
6. Ask them to walk up the scale to the number they want to be
at, only as quickly as they can feel their energy rising.
7. Take them beyond that point temporarily (calibrate signs of
rising energy level).
8. Take them back down below their starting point temporarily.
9. Let them walk back to wherever they want to be (NB this may
be a different number from their original desired level).
10. Have them roll up the energy scale and store it wherever
they want to keep it.
Clear up
What did you notice? As "client"? As coach?
You can also set up sliding anchors as "fader switches" e.g. along
the arm.
Use this exercise for:
--Stress Management, -Goal Setting, -Motivation
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 219 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Alphabet Editing
Timing: 5 minutes per round
Objectives:
• Demonstrates state-dependent memory, learning and
behaviour
• Demonstrates power of breaking state/pattern interrupt
• Introduces New Code NLP
Procedure
This is a light, enjoyable exercise that makes a nice close to a
day's training.
Get students into groups of 4 to 6. For each group, set up a copy
of the Alphabet Edit wallchart (in Wall Charts but reproduced
here for convenience).
A B C D E R L T L L
F G H I J R T T R L
K L M N O T L R L R
P Q R S T
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 220 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
T L T R R
U V W X Y L T R T L
Z R
Each group consists of Explorer and Helpers. Explorer thinks of a
problem (nothing too serious, but worth resolving). Explorer
attempts to hold the problem in mind while reciting each
alphabet letter out loud and simultaneously performing the
action indicated by the smaller letter underneath it:
R= raise right arm
L = raise left arm
T= raise both arms
Meanwhile Helpers attempt to distract the Explorer by singing,
waving, making funny faces, etc.
If the problem still exists by the end of the alphabet, go through
the letters again in reverse order. If necessary, go from the top
again, this time using the legs:
R= raise right leg
L= raise left leg
T= jump on the spot
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 221 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Change roles and repeat until everyone has had a go.
Clear up
What happened to the problem? (we would expect it to become
irrelevant or at least diminish)
Helpers - what signs of state change did you notice in the Explorer?
What you did there was a pattern interrupt. How else could you
use pattern interrupts in everyday life?
Variations
This would suit smaller groups of two (Explorer and Helper) or
three (with the addition of an Observer). Explorer identifies the
problem and thinks about how to solve it for a minute. Notice
how that feels.
Then perform the Alphabet Edit as above, but without trying to
hold the problem in mind, until a 'flow state' is reached.
Now think about how to solve the problem again - take up to 3
minutes. What's different now?
In place of the Alphabet Edit, you could use any activity that you
are familiar with that induces 'flow state' - e.g. juggling, dancing,
drumming, Tai Chi 'pushing hands', etc. Make sure that the
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 222 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
chosen activity will in fact induce a flow state in everyone as, for
example, dancing could be a negative anchor for some students.
Note: I believe this exercise was devised by John Grinder
(www.johngrinder.com)
Use this exercise for:
-Introduction to NLP, -Stress Management
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 223 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Peripheral Vision Desensitisation
Timing: 5 minutes per round
Objectives:
• Learn how to use peripheral vision to come to terms with
uncomfortable memories or images
• Also reinforces elegant use of anchoring
Procedure
Handout: Peripheral Vision Desensitisation
Demo this first.
Two participants - Client and Coach.
Emphasise that clients should choose memories or imaginings to
work with that are uncomfortable, rather than intense traumas or
phobias.
Coach proceeds according to Peripheral Vision Desensitisation
handouts.
Clear up
How did you get on?
What did you learn?
What do you want to ask?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 224 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Future pace: When could you use this?
Remind them that this is also a technique they could use for
themselves.
Note: this process was devised by Amy Chu (my first mentor in
NLP) and Susan Chu.
Use this exercise for:
-Stress Management, -Confidence, -Therapy Skills
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 225 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Time
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 226 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Back And Forward In Time
Timing: 5 minutes
Objectives:
• Makes participants more aware of how we use spatial
metaphors for time
• Makes participants more aware of ambiguities and potential
misunderstandings in how we talk about time
Procedure
Do this with the whole class.
"Say we have a meeting scheduled for Tuesday, and I tell you we
have to move it forward a day, what day is the meeting now
scheduled for? Monday or Wednesday?"
Explore the subjective experiences of someone who said 'Monday'
and someone who said 'Wednesday' (e.g. were they seeing a
calendar, did they have a sense of time as a line, and if so, which
direction does the line go?) How did they process the question
differently?
Repeat the questions for:
• Moving it back a day
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 227 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
With a deadline:
• Bringing it forward a day
• Pushing it forward a day
• Bringing it back a day
• Pushing it back a day
NB you may find that the same person interprets 'moving it
forward' differently from 'bringing it forward' or 'pushing it
forward'.
Clear up
What have you learned?
What could happen in a business context if people interpret
'moving a deadline forward' differently?
Use this exercise for:
-Time Management
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 228 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Elicit the Time Line
Timing: 3 minutes (elicitation) + 5 minutes clear-up (group) or 2
minutes clear-up (individual)
Objectives:
• Participants understand that different people have different
time lines (group)
• Participants discover their own time line
• Participants practice eliciting other's time lines (individual)
Procedure
Do this with the whole group initially, then have participants
elicit each other's time lines (along with 'test drive')
"If you were to imagine time as a sequence of events or moments,
so that one moment follows another, so it's like a line with the
past at one end and the future at the other, and now somewhere
in between, so that the past is in a particular direction in your
perceptual space, so that you could point to it, if I was to ask your
unconscious mind to point in to where the past is, where would
you point? And with the other hand, where's the future?"
Get the group to look at where everyone else is pointing – with
any luck there will be a mixture of "in time" and "through time".
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 229 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
"And where's now?" Again, some people will point to where they
are, others to about 18 inches in front of them.
If anyone has any difficulty with this method, use the second
version with a mundane memory (e.g. cleaning your teeth) from
this morning, yesterday, a week ago, a month ago, a year ago –
and corresponding intervals in the future.
Clear up
Some people (very few) may not have a line as their preferred
representation of time – but everyone can represent time as a line
and this is what we need for timeline clearing to work (if you are
going on to teach timeline clearing).
If you were just exploring people's spatial metaphors for time,
you would want to use much "cleaner" questions.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 230 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Test-Drive The Time Line
Timing: 5 minutes + 5 minutes clear-up (group); 3 minutes + 2
minutes feedback + 5 minutes group clear-up (pairs)
Objectives:
• Participants build confidence in floating above the timeline
• Participants learn "test drive" process for use with clients
• give an early warning of problems if any participant "can't"
float back above the past
Procedure
Do this with the whole group right after you’ve elicited the
timeline, then have the participants elicit the timeline and do the
test drive in pairs as one exercise. Ask the group to let you know
(by lifting their hand) when they've reached each stage.
1. Close your eyes and float up above the timeline to a height at
which you are completely comfortable. Sometimes you may
find it easier to stay where you are and let the timeline sink
away below you – either way let me know when you've reached
that comfortable height.
2. Now turn towards the past and float a short distance in that
direction, and just float there, and let me know when you're
floating there.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 231 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
3. Now turn around and float a similar short distance beyond
now towards the future, and let me know when you're floating
there.
4. Float back to above now and just practice floating up a little
and down a little and notice what happens as you do. Notice
the difference between this experience and your normal
everyday experience. And float up, and down, as many times as
you need to until you've noticed everything that's worth
noticing about that.
5. Bring back everything you liked about that experience as you
float back down to now, back into the room, and when your
unconscious mind is ready to move on to the next stage you
can open their eyes.
6. (When all have opened their eyes) – Welcome back.
Note the presuppositions in the language above.
Clear up
What was that like? How did it compare with normal everyday
experience?
Most people will say they felt “calm” or “detached” - this is what
we are looking for.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 232 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Very occasionally you may get a client who is uncomfortable
floating above the timeline. They can get a similar sense of
detachment by going off to one side of the timeline.
Use this exercise for:
-Stress Management, -Time Management
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 233 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Trying On A Different Timeline
Caution: you should only take a group through this exercise after
students have been through some form of timeline emotional
clearing to let go of emotional baggage - e.g. Time Line Therapy or
reimprinting.
Timing: 5 minutes to install + time to experience (at your
discretion) + 5 minutes to restore.
Objectives:
• Experience the world in a different way and understand
others better
• Have choice over your timeline's configuration and be able to
move between "In Time" and "Through Time" as appropriate.
• Improve your time management, or your ability to be "in the
moment", if needed
Procedure
You can do this as a group process. Schedule it immediately
before a break, or lunch, so that students have time to experience
the different timeline. Switch them back and do the clear up after
the break period.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 234 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
It's important that students realise that they can change their
timeline back any time they want – so make sure they understand
how to do this.
Some students may find a re-oriented timeline very
uncomfortable – in these cases it's best to switch them back
straight away.
The process:
1. Ask the students to close their eyes and be aware of their
timeline. Tell them to float up above 'now', to a height at
which they are completely comfortable.
2. Tell "in time" students to rotate the timeline around so the
past is to their left and the future is to their right (or
reorient themselves relative to the timeline if this is easier
for them). Through-time students can just enjoy floating
there for now.
3. Tell the in-time students to float back a little, so that they
are above a point about 18 inches 'back' from now (ie when
they come down, the timeline will be in front of them rather
than through them).
4. Get them to 'click' the timeline into place with the sound of
a Tupperware box closing. This analogue marker fixes the
timeline in its new configuration.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 235 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
5. For through time students, get them to rotate the timeline
so that the future is directly ahead of them, the past is
behind them, and 'now' is directly below them.
6. For these students, 'click' the new timeline into place.
7. Tell them to float back down and open their eyes and notice
how the new timeline orientation feels (if they are
uncomfortable with the new orientation, reverse the process
to switch it back).
8. Make sure they understand they can switch the timeline
back any time they want or need to.
Clear up
Check that students are OK with trying out their new timeline for
the break or lunch period. If anyone who has switched to "in
time" seems particularly relaxed, suggest that a "through time"
person keeps an eye on them (I used to co-train with someone
who was habitually 'through time'. When she switched to 'in time',
she became so laid-back that she couldn't reach a decision on the
lunchtime menu, and I had to order for her).
After the break, ask how people got on with their 'new' timelines.
How did it feel? What did they notice?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 236 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
You may find that some people want to keep their new timeline
for a while. Guide everyone else through switching it back (by
reversing the process above).
Emphasise once again that they can change their own timelines
any time they want. Point out that switching from "in time" to
"through time" can be a useful part of therapy for addictions,
enabling the client to be remember the bad consequences of
previous bouts and to be more aware of the future consequences
of present actions.
Emphasise that switching the timeline from "in time" to "through
time" should only be done if the client has already been through
timeline clearing to let go of emotional baggage. Otherwise,
bringing episodes that the client has 'put behind them' into view
on the "through" timeline can restimulate traumas.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 237 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Verb Tenses
Timing: 10 minutes (15 minutes if you do it in small groups)
Objectives:
• Participants become more aware of the effects of language on
internal representations of time
Procedure
Do this with the whole group, at least initially.
Ask the group "What is the difference in your internal
representation when you hear 'I walk' compared to 'I am walking?'
"
NB most people will see more movement in the second version.
What about 'I will walk?' and 'I will be walking'?
(NB from this point you could divide the class into small groups
to consider the following tenses, or go through them as a whole
class)
'I walked', 'I was walking', and 'I have walked'?
On the timeline, where is 'I had walked' compared to 'I walked'?
(NB most people will put 'I had walked' before I walked')
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 238 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
What is the difference in duration on the timeline between 'I
thought' and 'I was thinking?' (Most people will have 'I thought' as
a point and 'I was thinking' as a length of time)
Where is 'I will have decided' on the timeline, in terms of location
and of the direction of attention (NB in the future, looking back at
a decision that is still in the future relative to now, although the
decision process may be happening now)
What about 'I will have been deciding'? (NB in the future, looking
back at a decision process that is possibly yet to start)
You could ask each group to map out the location and, where
applicable, the direction of attention, on the timeline.
Optionally: from coaching or therapy point of view, what is the
difference between asking a client about:
• their problem;
• the problem they have been having;
• the problem they were having;
• the problem they had;
• the problem they used to have?
in terms of a) the effect on their subjective experience of the
problem and b) the effect on the rapport between client and
coach or client and therapist?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 239 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Clear up
What are you going to do differently as a result of what you have
learned?
Use this exercise for:
-Coaching Skills, -Counselling Skills, -Therapy Skills
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 240 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Values and Goal Setting
Use all the exercises in this section for:
-Goal Setting, -Motivation, -Coaching Skills, -Decision Making
For many more tips and exercises about values and goal-setting, get my book Achieve Your Goals: Strategies To Transform Your Life (Dorling Kindersley 2006)!
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 241 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Eliciting Values
Timing: 5-10 minutes per round
Objectives:
• Participants become skilled at eliciting values
• Participants understand the difference between elicitation and
installation
• Participants clarify their own values for a particular area of
their lives
Procedure
In pairs (coach and client). Use the ‘Values’ handout.
Demo this first, using a flip chart to write up the values down the
left side of the page. Make sure that 'coaches' understand they
need to keep their own values out of the way, that they are after
abstract concepts, and that they are not concerned at this point
with the meaning of the nominalisations used by the client.
For a particular context (e.g. work and career, finances, health and
fitness), ask:
“What’s important about <context>?”
If the answer is not sufficiently abstract (e.g. "meeting clients for
lunch", which is a specific behaviour rather than a value) keep
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 242 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
going until you get an abstract value: “What’s important about
<answer>?”
“What else is important?” and when they run out of answers ask:
“What else is important?” to get the values they are less
consciously aware of (often among the most important)
Clear up:
Normally one would expect between five and 15 values to emerge.
If there are more, it's not a problem – usually some of them turn
out to be part of other values and this will resolve during the next
exercise.
Check that the values elicited are in fact abstract – if any are too
concrete, ask "what's important about that?" to force the client up
into the abstract realm.
This exercise, and the other values elicitation exercises that follow, are based on those that I encountered on my NLP Practitioner training with Amy Chu. I believe they were developed by Tad James and/or John Overdurf and Julie Silverthorn. Time Line Therapy and the Basis of Personality by Tad James and Wyatt Woodsmall has a large section on values.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 243 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Prioritising Values
Timing: 5 minutes each
Objectives
• Participants practice putting values into a hierarchy of
importance
• Participants clarify their own values hierarchy for a particular
context
Procedure
Again, demo this. Ideally use the same person as before (as their
values are already up on the flip chart). If they have a really long
list of values, use a person with a much shorter list (e.g. 6 values)
if there is one.
In the same pairs as before, ask:
“If you could only have one of these values, which one would
you have?”
Write ! next to that value.
“And if you could have one more, which one would you have?”
Write " next to that value – and so on.
Rewrite the list of values in the order of importance - you may
find that some of the values elicited in the previous exercise
are the same and have merged.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 244 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
If the client is unsure which value comes next in the hierarchy,
say "You can have either <value A> or <value B> but not both –
which one does it have to be?"
Clear-up
What did you learn?
What do I need to know?
What happened to the values as you prioritised them?
This stage is often where the values list gets shorter as clients
realise that two values they identified in the previous stage are
one and the same – point this out to the participants.
Point out that "Money" is insufficiently abstract to be at the top of
a well-formed values hierarchy. People who put money above
everything else are prone
to making bad decisions
and are rarely happy or
fulfilled.
Variation: Write each value on a sticky note and
arrange and rearrange them in a hierarchy until
they feel right.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 245 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Checking for Values Conflicts
Timing: 5 minutes per person
Objectives:
• Participants learn how to check the values hierarchy for
clashes
• Participants discover any clashes in their own values (in the
context used for this exercise)
Procedure
Demo this.
In pairs:
For each value, check that it 'goes with' each other value. They
don't have to actively support each other, as long as they can
coexist peacefully.
(Starting with the lowest value): "Does this value go with <value
above it>?" "Does it go with <one above that>?" and so on to the
top value.
Then do the same with the next highest value, and so on until
each value has been checked against each of the values above it.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 246 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Clear up
What if there is a clash? Ideally we would use "Parts Integration"
to resolve the clash. In the meantime, ask the client to find ways
in which both values can coexist – usually the problem arises
because the client has been thinking of the value in terms of a
particular behaviour or activity. Values, because they are abstract,
can be fulfilled in many different ways.
Remind the participants that if a clash is resolved or an away-
from motivation is cleared, the values hierarchy has almost
certainly changed and should be re-elicited.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 247 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Eliciting Motivation Direction
Timing: 5-10 minutes per person
Objectives:
• Participants learn how to elicit the proportions of towards and
away from motivation in a client's values
• Participants learn how to hear "concealed away-froms" in the
client's language
• Participants discover the proportions of towards and away
from in their own values (in the context used for the exercise)
Procedure
Demo this briefly.
In pairs, ask for each value in the hierarchy (starting at the top):
“Why is <value> important to you?” Yes, the 'forbidden question'!
The answer may come in terms of what you want (“because I love
it”) or in terms of what you don’t want (“because if I don’t have it,
it will be terrible”).
Watch out for ‘concealed away froms’ which come out as
comparisons (“it’s better to have money” – better than what?) or
as “shoulds”, “oughts”, “musts” etc.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 248 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Ask the client to estimate the percentage of towards and away
from in each value. Also pay attention to non-verbal and tonal
indications.
Clear-up
Why is this important? Because away from motivation leads to
stress and to inconsistent results.
Clues about the client's motivation may be helpful in getting
more business. E.g. if mainly '"towards", talk about the benefits of
further coaching programmes. If mainly "away from", talk about
the potential downside of not signing up for the programmes.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 249 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Defining Goals in Positive Language
Timing: 2 minutes each way
Objectives:
• Become more aware of away-from motivation in your goal
• Notice where your goal is defined in terms of what it is not
rather than what it is
Procedure
In pairs. Person A talks about a goal that they have. Person B
listens. When Person B hears the goal described positively, give
the thumbs-up sign. Any time Person A talks about what the goal
is not, or what the goal will stop happening or get away from,
Person B gives the thumbs-down sign.
Swap over after two minutes.
Clear up
What did you notice?
How easy was it to talk only about what the goal is, rather than
what it isn’t, or what you want to get away from?
What have you learned, and what are you going to do differently
as a result?
Note: This exercise is based on one that I learned from the very talented Kate Trafford of Go Beyond NLP
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 250 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
P.O.W.E.R. Goal-Setting
Timing: 10 minutes (demo), 15 minutes per person
Objectives:
• Participants can check goals against well-formed outcome
criteria
• Participants shape up one of their own goals using these
criteria
Procedure
Demo this first. Participants should have previously been thinking
about some goal that they have.
In pairs (coach and client). Coach interviews the client about their
goal, checking that the goal satisfies each P.O.W.E.R. criterion and
assisting the client in tweaking the goal where necessary.
Use the P.O.W.E.R. criteria from the Handouts.
P - Positive
O - Own it
W – What and When
E – "Ecology" (Effects on every area of your life)
R – Resources and Route
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 251 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Clear-up
What have you learned? What do I need to know?
How do you feel about your goal now?
(If any doubt or incongruence, demo how to amend the goal to
bring it in line with POWER)
Variations
You could, of course, substitute your own favourite checklist for
a well-formed outcome - e.g. Richard Bolstad's SPECIFY, or SMART
(although note that the classic SMART model - Specific,
Measurable, Achievable, Realistic, and Timed - doesn't include
anything about whether you care if you achieve the goal or not).
The POWER conditions for a well-formed outcome are adapted from a model by Jenny
Flintoft of Rock Solutions (www.rock-solutions.com) Used by permission.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 252 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
The ‘Compass’ Well-Formed Outcome
Process
Timing: min. 10 minutes per person
Objectives:
• To explore a well-formed outcome in a physical way
• Get clearer about a goal and what it means to you
Procedure
Two participants, Explorer and Guide (can also be done as a DIY
exercise). Use these instructions as a handout, and use the
‘Compass For A Well-formed Outcome’ wallchart if you wish.
1. Mark out five positions on the floor in the shape of a cross
to represent the centre and the cardinal points of the
compass. Make each point a short step away from the
centre.
Make sure there is enough space ahead of you to be able to
walk forward 'off' the compass.
Centre: Positive statement of the outcome.
North: A full representation of the desired outcome.
East: The context in which you want to achieve this
outcome.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 253 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
South: The positive by products of the status quo, and the
things you will lose if you achieve your outcome.
West: The resources at your disposal to achieve your
outcome and whether the outcome is under your control.
2. Step into the centre of the compass and state your outcome
in positive terms. As you develop the various aspects of
your outcome you will return to this spot to add in new
learnings and perspectives.
3. Step forward onto the 'North' marker. Imagine being in the
achievement of that outcome. In your minds eye see what
you see, hear what you hear and feel what you feel as if it
had already happened. When you have fully experienced
what it is like to achieve that outcome, step back into the
centre bringing that experience into your outcome, and
allowing those sights sounds and feelings to enrich the
outcome for a few moments.
4. Step right to the 'East' marker. Consider for a few moments
the context of the outcome. Where, when and with whom do
you want to achieve this outcome? Consider all the
circumstances in which the desired outcome would be
helpful and when it might not. When you have done this,
step back to the centre and allow these learnings to enrich
the outcome.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 254 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
5. Step back to the 'South' marker. Consider the benefits of
your current situation, what will you lose by taking this
course of action. What kind of things would you like to take
into the future with you? When you have done this, step
back into the centre allowing these learnings to enrich the
outcome.
6. Step to the left onto the 'West' marker and consider the
following questions: Is this outcome under my control, can I
influence it? What resources do I have and what do I need to
achieve my outcome? If the outcome is not under your
control then you may need to adjust your objective to be
something that you can control. The resources you need
could be time, money, people, skills, information or states of
mind.
When you have identified the resources bring them back to
the centre and let them enrich the outcome.
7. Stand at the centre of your outcome for a few moments and
let the various aspects settle into place. Ask yourself: 'Do I
still want this outcome?'
8. Consider for a few moments who else is involved in this
outcome. Imagine that they are standing a few paces away
from your compass. Just go with whatever springs to mind.
As you imagine a person (or group of people) standing there,
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 255 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
step off the compass and into the shoes of those people,
looking back at yourself from their point of view.
How does your outcome look to them? What do they think
about what you're trying to achieve? You may be surprised
by what you discover. When you are ready, bring everything
that you have learned back into the centre of the compass
and let it blend into your outcome. Repeat this step for each
of the different parties involved.
9. Now move to a ‘detached observer’ location a few paces
away and look back at your outcome and everybody in it
from a more dispassionate point of view. How does the
outcome fit together? What more do you need to know?
When you’re ready, bring everything that you have learned
back to the centre of the compass.
10. Take some time to experience your outcome now, ask
yourself the question 'Do I still want this outcome?'
You can follow this exercise up with the ‘Goal Installation
Exercise’ below.
Note: This exercise was devised by Newcastle, UK based NLP trainer Andy Hunt, who runs extremely reasonably priced NLP Practitioner and Master Practitioner courses: www.integritynlp.co.uk Used by kind permission.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 256 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Reasons vs Excuses Exercise
Timing: 5 minutes (individually, writing down reasons) + 10
minutes per person (pairs)
Objectives:
• Participants understand difference between "reasons" for not
achieving a goal and excuses for not achieving a goal
• For a particular goal, participants identify their own excuses
for not achieving it, and turn them into positive beliefs
Procedure
Using the goal from previous exercises:
1. Individually – list out all the reasons for not achieving your
goal (5 minutes)
2. In pairs – talk through each reason for not achieving the goal
and convert it into a more positive belief by:
• Putting yourself "at cause", or even asking "What would
someone who is at cause say?"
• Turn it into a question (e.g. "I can't afford it" becomes "How
can I afford it?")
• Reframe it into something more positive
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 257 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
• Actively look for counter-examples in your own experience.
What would you like to believe instead? You will find the
evidence for the new empowering belief when you look for
it.
• Check the motivation strategy – are you focusing on end
result or the imagined slog of getting there?
Clear up
How do you feel about your goal now? Any reasons left for not
achieving it?
If necessary, reframe or zap remaining excuses by any means
necessary.
Persistent excuses are generally a sign of incongruence about the
goal – is that what they really want or does it need some changes?
Note: I first encountered the ‘reasons or excuses’ concept on a course by David Shephard
www.performancepartnership.com
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 258 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Goal Installation Exercise
Timing: 10 mins per person
Objectives
• Participants learn a powerful goal installation method
• Participants install a goal into their future time line
Procedure
Demo this first.
In pairs (coach and client) install a goal using the "Walking Your
Goal Into The Future Timeline" instructions from the manual.
Before stepping on the timeline with the goal, clients should have
associated into the goal (to fully experience the positive emotions
of achieving it and so boost their motivation) and then stepped
out of it (so the unconscious mind knows that they are not there
yet).
Clear Up
Ask "Is your goal going to happen?" Expect an enthusiastic and
congruent "Yes!"
What did you learn? What do you want to ask? What do I need to
know?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 259 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Emotions and Relationships
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 260 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Recognising Emotion - Left and Right
Brains
(Note - this isn’t really an NLP exercise but I thought you might like it, so consider it a free bonus!) Timing: 2 minutes
Objectives
• Participants discover if they are better at recognising
emotions using one side or the other of their field of vision.
Procedure
Hand out the picture on the following page. Ask participants to
focus on the nose of each face in turn, and decide which one
looks happier.
Clear up
Who thought the face on the left looked happier? Who thought
the picture on the right looked happier?
The two pictures are mirror images of each other.
Most people find the right hand face looks happier. For people
who are ‘normally wired', the right brain specialises in processing
facial signals to judge emotions.
Use this exercise for:
-Emotional Intelligence, -Interpersonal Skills
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 261 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 262 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Making Finer Distinctions In Emotions
Timing: 3 minutes each round
Objectives:
• Participants gain practice in distinguishing between different
emotions
• Participants become more able to distinguish between
physical sensations and the emotional 'labels' we put on them,
and consequently have more choices over their responses
• Participants can distinguish more easily between different
levels of intensity in emotions (e.g. the sort of anger that you
experience primarily in clenched fists may be very different
from anger that you feel mainly in your head)
Procedure
Do this exercise in pairs - Explorer and Guide. Guide takes the
Explorer through these steps.
Step 1: Check how you are feeling right now. Optionally, you can
recall a problem situation (just around a 3 or 4 on the intensity
scale, rather than a 10!). Notice the quality and intensity of the
feeling. Describe how you are feeling about this (not the content
of the situation).
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 263 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Step 2: How do you know you are feeling this emotion? Guide
uses Meta Model questions to reconnect the emotion with direct
sensory experience:
• Where in your body do you feel it?
• How intense is it?
• Is the intensity constant or variable?
• What kind of sensation is it - warm/cool, heavy/light,
moving/still…etc?
• Are there any visual or auditory components?
Step 3: Now describe how you feel again. What is different in
quality and/or intensity?
Clear up
What did you discover?
What happened to the feeling?
(NB what often seems to happen is that for most people, a
'negative' emotion becomes less intense, while a 'positive'
emotion becomes stronger.
This exercise is derived from a Zen meditation exercise designed
to detach physical sensations from the emotional 'labels' we put
on them.
Use this exercise for:
-Emotional Intelligence
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 264 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Understanding Your Own Emotions
Timing: 10 minutes per round
Objectives:
• Participants understand more of their own emotional
responses, their origins, and the messages they carry
• Participants gain a useful set of questions for coaching for
emotional intelligence
What to say beforehand
While most people are aware of their 'surface' emotions in any
given situation, becoming aware of underlying feelings usually
takes more time and attention than many people are in the habit
of giving themselves.
Would you like an opportunity to increase your self-awareness,
and to learn a set of structured questions to coach yourself, or
another person, through understanding their emotions, and the
messages they carry, better?
Procedure
In pairs - Explorer and Coach.
Coach asks Explorer to recall an event about which they still have
some unresolved feelings (no more than 5 on the 'Richter scale'),
or some event about which they have significant positive emotion.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 265 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Coach guides the Explorer through examining their memory of
the event using these questions:
• How do you feel about this?
• What else do you feel?
• What is behind that feeling?
• When have you felt like this before?
• What is this feeling trying to tell you?
The exact point in the conversation at which the Coach asks each
question will be guided by the Explorer's responses.
Clear up
What did you learn? (expect some 'aha' moments)
Explorers - what did your coach ask or do that was particularly
helpful?
Coaches - how did you know it was the right time to ask the next
question?
Use this exercise for:
-Emotional Intelligence, -Coaching Skills, -Counselling Skills, -
Therapy Skills
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 266 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Learning From "Difficult" People
Timing: 5 minutes per person + 5 minutes clear-up
Objectives
• Participants understand that "difficult" people are both mirrors
and learning opportunities
• Participants learn process for helping clients learn from
"difficult" people
• Participants improve their experience of one "difficult" person
• Preframes time line clearing (through principle that "negative"
events can be learned from, and that they continue to happen
until we learn what we need to learn from them)
• Also preframes "second position"
Procedure
In pairs – coach and client, then swap. No need to demo.
Coach asks client:
1. Think of a person who does something that you don’t like.
2. What is the positive intention behind their behaviour? Put
yourself in their shoes and see things from their point of view
(NB don’t do this with mad people). See yourself briefly
through their eyes. What do you learn from this different
viewpoint?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 267 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
3. If that person’s behaviour had a positive intention towards you
behind it, what would that positive intention be? What positive
lessons do you need to learn from your interaction with that
person?
4. Ask yourself: How am I like that person? When do I behave like
that?
Clear up
What did you learn?
What is the positive intention behind that person's behaviour?
What is the "universe's positive intention towards you"?
How do you think of that person now?
We're not saying the universe has a positive intention towards
you by sending this person along (if you would like to support
this actually quite useful belief, you can nod while you're saying
this, as if you actually think that it has) – we're asking "If there
was a positive intention for you, what would it be?"
Use this exercise for:
-Dealing With Difficult People, -Spiritual Development, -Stress
Management, -Management, -Customer Service
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 268 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Meta-Mirror Exercise
Timing: 15 minutes per person + 5 minutes clear-up
Objectives
• Participants experience and understand the difference between different perceptual positions
• Participants learn a powerful process for improving working (and other) relationships and for dealing with "difficult" people
• Participants improve one of their own relationships
Procedure
Demo this first, then have participants do it in pairs.
Use the Meta-Mirror process from the handouts.
Important points to remember:
• Break state after first and second positions
• Get the demo subject to totally get into character in second position
• To get more detachment in third position, the demo subject could stand on a chair.
Clear up
What do you want to ask? What do I need to know?
When participants run into problems, it's usually because they
have not sufficiently broken state between first, second and third
positions.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 269 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Don't use this process where the client seriously believes that the
difficult person is "evil", mentally disturbed or seriously ill (to
avoid 'contamination').
The Meta-Mirror format was devised by Robert Dilts
(www.nlpu.com).
Use this exercise for:
-Dealing With Difficult People, -Stress Management, -Management,
-Customer Service, -Spiritual Development
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 270 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Quick 'Eyes Of Love' Exercise
Timing: 5 minutes
Objectives:
• Participants learn a quick way to accept and value themselves
more
• Unpacking the exercise will reinforce learnings about
submodalities, particularly dissociation, and chunking up to
general and back down to specifics
Procedure
This is a guided visualisation that you can take the whole class
through.
"Now close your eyes and move away from yourself, so you see
yourself sitting there. Move away to a comfortable distance,
where you can see yourself with some context around you.
"Now there are certain people who love you, or who thinks well of
you - perhaps someone who is grateful to you for something
you've done, or maybe just for who you are. Now see this person
in the doorway, looking at you as you sit there.
Float across so that you are standing next to that person who
loves you, looking back at the you that is sitting there, so that you
see yourself almost from their viewpoint. Notice how that feels.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 271 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
"Now float into this person's viewpoint, so that you look at
yourself through their eyes. See yourself as this person sees you.
And I wonder what you learn from this viewpoint? It may be that
you notice some qualities to appreciate, some of your qualities
that you already knew you have. It may be that this person has
noticed qualities in you that you didn't realise up till now that
you have, or that you are only just realising are your qualities.
"Notice what it's like to really see yourself through these eyes.
Notice how it feels to see yourself through the eyes of love...
(pause for a few seconds)
"And for each of these qualities that you appreciate, of course
this person knows you have them from memories of seeing you
display those qualities - times when you showed the best of who
you can be, events that mean something to this person even if
you didn't realise the significance at the time, or even if you had
forgotten them up to now. And as you notice or remember some
of these occasions when you showed your good qualities, as you
watch them unfold clear and bright through the eyes of love, you
may notice a realisation or a growing sense that you have these
good qualities, and you have them strongly.
"And very soon it will be time to return to your self, so noticing
anything else that's worth noticing, bring back everything that
you've learned and everything that you've enjoyed about this
exercise, as you float back towards your self, into your body, and
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 272 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
take as long as you need for your unconscious mind to integrate
all of these learnings into your everyday viewpoint now as you
return to your wide-awake and fully conscious self.
And the person who loves you can bid you farewell for now, and
walk away, having given you this gift of seeing yourself.
And any time you want to in the future, you know that you can
take a little time to see yourself through the eyes of love. So when
your unconscious mind is ready to move on to the next stage you
can open your eyes."
Clear up
What happened? What did you learn? What do you want to ask?
You may find that some participants get a bit teary during this
exercise - give them some time to integrate the learnings.
Use this exercise for:
-Self-Esteem
Note: This is a variant of the 'Autobiography' exercise in the book NLP: The New Technology of Achievement by Steve Andreas, Charles Faulkner and the NLP Comprehensive team. Admirers of Steve Andreas' excellent book Transform Your Self will also recognise the use of specific memories to strengthen self-concept.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 273 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Accessing Heart Intelligence
Timing: 5 minutes + 5 minutes clear-up Objectives:
• Participants are able to associate into "heart" feelings and
viewpoint
• Enables "Problem Solving With Heart and Gut" exercise
Procedure
Take the group through this:
"Place your hand over your heart. Imagine you are breathing into
the heart area. Associate into core heart feelings of love, care and
compassion. Take as long as you need, until you feel a shift."
Ensure everyone has got there, then bring them back after a
couple of minutes.
Clear up
How do you feel now?
What do you want to ask?
What do I need to know?a
Use this exercise for:
-Emotional Intelligence, -Decision Making, -Stress Management
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 274 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Problem-Solving With Heart And Gut
Timing: 15 minutes per person + 5 minutes clear-up
Objectives:
• Participants learn process for helping clients access emotional information in problem solving and decision making
• Participants resolve a problem or "difficult" decision of their own
Procedure
Do immediately after the "Accessing Heart Intelligence" and
"Centering" exercises.
No real need to demo this (although you can).
NB the exercise assumes that the participants are already
considering the problem from a "head" (ie left-brained)
perspective.
Follow the steps from the "Accessing Heart and Gut Intelligence"
handout.
Clear-Up
How did that go?
How do you feel about the problem or decision now?
What do you want to ask?
What do I need to know?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 275 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Normally the problem will resolve, or at least participants will
find that from at least one viewpoint the problem is lessened and
they feel more resourceful.
Point out that, like perceptual positions, this is another way of
getting a multiple description of a problem or situation.
If a person has difficulty associating into the hara or they feel
that it is blocked, normally some "Ha" abdominal breathing will
sort things out.
Use this exercise for:
-Emotional Intelligence, -Decision Making, -Stress Management
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 276 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Exploration
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 277 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Exploring NLP Presuppositions
Timing: 10 minutes per round
Objectives:
• Participants deepen their understanding of the NLP presuppositions
• Participants loosen up their model of the world and make progress with an issue chosen by them
Procedure
In pairs. Write your favourite NLP presuppositions (e.g. "The map
is not the territory", "Mind and body are one system") on cards or
A4 sheets.
Participant A selects 6 presuppositions, arranges them in a circle
and stands in the middle of them. A thinks of a problem or issue.
Participant B guides them in standing on the presuppositions in
turn and asks coaching questions, e.g.:
"How does the issue look in the light of this
presupposition?"
"What would be different if this presupposition were true?"
"What feels different from here?"
"How does this presupposition change that issue?"
The choice of the next presupposition may flow organically from
the conversation so far, or you can choose another one at
random. It's OK to revisit a presupposition.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 278 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Continue until the issue loosens, or until all presuppositions have
been explored. Swap places and continue.
Clear up
What did your coach do or say that was most helpful?
Which was the most useful presupposition, and what happened
when you stepped into it?
What else do you want to ask/share/know?
Future Pace
When will holding these presuppositions (or acting as if they are
true) be useful to you in future?
Variations
You could use any number of presuppositions - 3, 4, 8. With
larger numbers, participants may not get to step into all of them.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 279 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Exploring Frames
Timing: 10-15 minutes each way, plus clear up
Objectives:
• Familiarise with different frames
• Gain greater flexibility in choosing frames in coaching
• Gain greater clarity about a decision or problem
Procedure
In pairs - ‘Explorer’ and ‘Guide’. Use the ‘Frames’ handout.
Explorer chooses an issue that he/she would like more clarity on.
Guide chooses a frame and asks questions from that frame, with
the aim of helping Explorer to reach a resolution. Guide can
choose the most appropriate frame for that point in the
conversation, and switch frames whenever it would be helpful.
Choose frames from a list including the following:
• Outcome frame
• Ecology frame
• “As If” frame
• Backtrack frame
• Contrast frame
• Appreciative frame
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 280 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Variation - ‘Spatial Framing’
Write the name of each frame on a piece of paper and use them to
mark out different places on the floor. Move to the appropriate
place when considering the issue using a particular frame.
Clear up
What did you learn?
(Explorers) Which frame was most helpful?
(Guides) How did you choose the frame or frames you used? How
did you know it was time to switch frames?
(If using the ‘Spatial Framing’ variation) What happened when you
moved to a different frame?
What are you going to do differently now that you’ve learned this?
Use this exercise for:
-Decision Making, -Goal Setting, -Management
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 281 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Neuro-Logical Levels Review
Timing: 15 minutes + clear-up
Objectives:
• Become familiar with Neuro-Logical Levels distinctions
Procedure:
In pairs. Use the “Neuro-Logical Levels” handout.
First, take 10 minutes by yourself to review your job role (or the
main thing you do, e.g. homemaker) in the light of each neuro-
logical level.
Environment: When and where do you do this?
Behaviour: What do you do?
Capabilities: How do you do it?
Values and beliefs: What's important to you about doing it? What
belief enables you to do it?
Identity: Who are you when you are doing this? (or "Who are you
as a <role>?) How does this role fit with who you are?
Spiritual/Connectedness: What is your purpose in doing this? (or
"How does this role fit in with your life's purpose?" or "How does
this role connect you to others/your community/the
planet/God?")
Now take 5 minutes to discuss this with your partner.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 282 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Clear up
What did you learn?
What are you going to do differently as a result of what you have
learned?
Use this exercise for:
-Coaching Skills, -Decision Making, -Goal Setting (you would adapt
it to consider goal rather than role), -Motivation
Note: This exercise is based on one by Steve Bavister and Amanda Vickers in their book Essential NLP: Teach Yourself - a good introductory book especially for people who aren’t big readers! The Neuro-Logical Levels model was developed by Robert Dilts (www.nlpu.com)
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 283 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Neuro-Logical Levels Compliments
Timing: 10 minutes
Objectives:
• Become familiar with Neuro-Logical Levels distinctions
Procedure
In groups of 3 or 4. Use the “Neuro-Logical Levels” handout.
Think of a restaurant that you like to visit (don't say which it is,
to preserve agreement in your group). Now you have 10 minutes
to come up with one-line descriptions of what you like about this
restaurant from each neuro-logical level - e.g.
Environment: "It's in a lovely area with safe parking"
Behaviour: "Where they do it right"
Capability: "They know how to treat people"
Beliefs: "They put customer care before everything else"
Identity: "The seafood restaurant"
Spiritual: "Changing the world, one meal at a time"
Clear up
Which levels was it easiest to come up with something for?
What would be different if you were making statements about
something different - a car? A person? A country? A philosophical
system?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 284 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
When people compliment you, which level do you normally take it
at?
When people criticise you, which level do you normally take it at?
Notice how people may get into the habit of taking feedback about
themselves, positive or negative, at a particular level - e.g. a
criticism of something they have done (Behaviour) may be taken as
an attack at the Identity level.
What are you going to do differently as a result of this exercise?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 285 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Coaching With Neuro-Logical Levels
Timing: 20 minutes (demo) + 20 minutes each way (pairs) +
clear up
Objectives
• Participants experience power of neuro-logical levels as
coaching tool
• Participants gain more clarity about their own identity and
purpose
• Participants solve some problem or feel more resourceful about it
Procedure
Use the “Neuro-Logical Levels” handout.
Demo this first, then have participants work in pairs. They will
need enough room to put the '"levels" out on the floor. Use
"Coaching With The Neuro-Logical Levels" instructions from
handouts.
As coach, stay on the "resource" side of the neuro-logical levels
map.
Participants may take a bit longer than 20 minutes to complete.
Clear Up
What did you discover? As coach? As client?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 286 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Remind participants that this is only one way to use neuro-logical
levels – encourage them to be creative.
NB if they encounter emotional problems at any level, as very
occasionally happens, get them to step back down to a more
comfortable level. Frame the emotions as valuable information
and a basis for further exploration.
Use this exercise for:
-Coaching Skills, -Spiritual Development
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 287 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Neuro-Logical Levels of Teams
Timing: 15-20 minutes each way + clear-up
Objectives
• Re-familiarise with Neuro-Logical Levels model in a team context
• Participants can use this model to analyse a team's alignment with its mission and values, its skills needs, and its ability to learn from experience
Procedure
In pairs – participants talk each other through using the Neuro-
Logical Levels model to analyse a team of which they were
formerly a member (perhaps from the Good Team/Bad Team
exercise previously) or a team with which they are currently
working. Use the questions from the “Neuro-Logical Levels of
Teams” handout, starting from the top.
Clear up
What do you want to ask? What do I need to know? How easy was
that to use?
How will you use this in future?
Alignment is essential – if the team's behaviour contradicts its
stated mission or values, team members and customers will
believe the behaviour rather than the stated mission.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 288 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Changes at lower levels may or may not affect the higher levels –
changes at the higher levels will definitely affect the lower levels.
Use this exercise for:
-Team-Building
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 289 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Whose Meta Program Is It Anyway?
Timing: 20 minutes (a few minutes per participant) + 10
minutes clear-up
Objectives:
• Participants can reproduce (in extreme form) characteristics of meta programs – and hence understand them.
• Participants can identify characteristics of different meta programs
• Participants gain a better understanding of their own meta programs (by experiencing which patterns are easier or harder to do)
Procedure
This is a group activity based on the "Party Quirks" game from the
old TV show "Whose Line Is It Anyway?". You could use music to
enhance the "party" aspect – as long as the participants can still
hear each other.
Each participant takes it in turn to be the "party host". The other
participants are each given a Meta Program card. Each participant
in turn arrives at the party and acts out the characteristics of
their meta program. When the host correctly identifies the meta
program, the next guest comes in.
Repeat until each participant has had a turn as host.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 290 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Points to consider • Participants may find some meta program patterns harder to
act out than others. Provided they have intellectually understood the pattern, this may give clues to their own habitual meta program patterns.
• Meta programs can change over time – e.g. one of the aims of Army basic training is to make the soldiers more task-oriented.
• Meta programs can be different in different contexts – a person may be very task-oriented at work and more people-oriented with their friends or family.
Clear up
Which meta programs were easier to reproduce for you? Which ones were harder? Which are easier to recognise? Which are you not sure about yet?
Meta programs originated with patterns noticed by Richard Bandler. Leslie Cameron-Bandler, David Gordon, Robert Dilts and Maribeth Meyers-Anderson expanded the list up to an unwieldy 60 or so. The most widely used model of meta programs today is based on Rodger Bailey’s Language and Behaviour (LAB) Profile (www.labprofile.com), popularised in Shelle Rose Charvet’s very readable book “Words That Change Minds”. Note: many UK NLP trainers refer to ‘meta-programmes’ or similar. Wrong! The metaphor comes from computer programs, which even in the UK are always spelled the American way. Ask any IT geek.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 291 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Meta Program Influencing Language
Timing: 20 minutes + 10 minutes clear-up
Objectives
• Participants practice language to influence different meta program profiles
Procedure
In groups of three. Each group is assigned a different meta
program pattern. Each group is assigned a different meta
program – the task is to produce one-paragraph "brochures" for
the benefits of coaching to suit either end of the spectrum for
each pattern.
When the 20 minutes is up, each group reads their brochures and
explains why they used the language they did – the other groups
can ask them to justify their choices.
Suggested patterns include:
• Adaptive Response: Judger/Perceiver (Procedures/options)
• Frame of Reference: Internal/External
• Motivation Direction: Towards/away
Clear Up
What did you learn?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 292 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
S.C.O.R.E. Process
Timing: 15 minutes per person plus 5 minutes clear up
Objectives:
• Participants gain experience in using the S.C.O.R.E. model as a coaching tool
• Participants experience the process as a client
• Participants solve some genuine problem
Procedure
In pairs – client and coach. Use some or all of the S.C.O.R.E. model
handouts.
Working on some genuine problem (not a major life crisis) that
you don't mind talking about, coach guides the client through the
problem space using the S.C.O.R.E. model. It's best to start at
Symptoms – you can go in any direction from there.
Set out the different elements on the floor and physically walk
between them.
Swap round after 15 minutes.
Clear Up
What did you find? How do you feel about the problem now? What
will be the longer term consequences?
How do you feel about using this with clients?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 293 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Notice how standing on the Resources area allows you to gain a
dissociated view of problems - this can make insight easier.
Point out how this can be used with groups – putting flip charts
in the different locations so the group moves between them.
Note: The SCORE Model was developed by Robert Dilts and Todd
Epstein.
Use this exercise for:
-Coaching Skills, -Team-Building, -Problem Solving
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 294 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Satir Categories Exercise
Timing: (after you've explained the categories) - 5 minutes plus
clear up
Objectives:
• Participants learn the Satir categories (Blamer, Placater,
Computer, Distracter, Leveller)
• Participants become more aware of how embodying one Satir
category can 'trigger' the automatic adoption of a
complementary Satir category in others
• Participants will be able to notice when they are
'automatically' going into an unhelpful Satir category in real
life
• Participants gain additional self-awareness around which
categories are easy and habitual for them, and which they find
unfamiliar or hard to inhabit
• Participants experiment with behavioural flexibility
Procedure
Use the ‘Satir Categories’ handout. As you explain each Satir
category, model it and have the students try out the physiology of
each category.
Then - have the participants stand up and interact in groups of 5-
9, each in the character of one or other of the Satir categories.
Have them periodically switch to another category - whichever
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 295 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
one feels most natural in the context of the interaction, or just
pick another at random. Continue until everyone has tried out
each Satir category.
If needed, trainer can also intervene in character of one of the
categories to keep the energy levels up and keep it fun.
Clear up
How did you find that?
Which Satir categories came easily to you?
Which were less easy?
How did you feel, and how did you respond when another person
was in Blamer mode? (repeat this question for the other
categories).
What to expect
This is usually a fun exercise. Occasionally a participant will find
this exercise uncomfortable, perhaps seeing it as a test of acting
skills that they don't believe they have. Invite them to consider
the fact that they had this response as useful information about
themselves, and to ask themselves (without having to share the
answer) "What do I need to learn from this?"
Many participants will have a favourite one or two categories, and
may find it hard to adopt others. This again is useful information
for them - remind them that any behaviour is going to be useful
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 296 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
in some context, and so developing their behavioural flexibility to
encompass their least preferred Satir categories is a good idea.
Future pace
When will this be useful? (Examples: when you find yourself
automatically slipping into behaviour from an unresourceful Satir
category, when you notice this happening in other people). You
can also mention the ways in which the different Satir categories
can be used in presentations.
Note: The Satir Categories were developed by family therapist
Virginia Satir, one of the original ‘genius therapists’ that Bandler
and Grinder modelled to create the first patterns of NLP. Her
book The New Peoplemaking is a good place to study the
Categories in more depth.
Use this exercise for:
-Dealing With Difficult People, -Presentation Skills
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 297 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Time and Perceptual Positions Exercise
Timing: 15 minutes per round
Objectives:
• Gain new knowledge and perspectives on past events
• Deepen self-awareness
Procedure:
In pairs - Explorer and Guide (optionally in 3's with Observer).
Explorer thinks of either a current problem, a past problem that
they would like to learn something from, or a success they would
like to be able to replicate more easily.
Draw a grid out on the floor with Perceptual Positions and Past,
Present, Future.
Starting in the centre of the grid (Self, Present) the Explorer
experiences his/her representation of the issue. Explorer can
describe their experience from this perspective out loud, or leave
it content-free, at their discretion. Guide can move them on to
another position, or ask questions aimed at structure-related
information, if Explorer is getting bogged down in content or
associating too much into a problem or an unresourceful state.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 298 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Guide invites the Explorer to step into another position on the
grid (e.g. Other, Past) and explore the issue from there. A good
question is "What is different from this perspective?" The choice
of this and subsequent positions is between the Guide (based on
what if anything has been described by the Explorer).
Continue exploring the problem from different perspectives of
time and perceptual position until some insight is reached.
Clear up
What did you find?
What have you learned?
Explorers - what did your guide do that was most helpful?
Guides - how did you know when it was time to move on to another
position?
How did you decide which position to move to next?
Note: I believe it was Robert Dilts who had the idea of combining
Perceptual Positions with Time perspectives - let me know if you
have better information!
Use this exercise for:
-Coaching Skills, -Decision Making, -Therapy Skills
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 299 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Strategies and Modelling
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 300 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
"Teach Me How To Do It"
Timing: 10 minutes (demo) 15 mins (pairs) Objectives:
• Participants learn how to deconstruct a strategy for having a
problem, while gathering information
• Participants have one of their own problem strategies loosened up – maybe even sorted out
Procedure
Demo this first. Ask for a volunteer with some behaviour pattern
or emotional response that they'd like to change and that they
don't mind talking about (e.g. insomnia, or a feeling of panic
when people are late). Rapport is vital!
1. "Let's say I have to fill in for you. How
do you know when to <have the
problem>? How do you do this? Can you
do it now?"
Elicits triggers for
problem and frames it
as something they do
2. "If I was from a 'temporary agency' and
I'm sent along to be you for a day so
you can have a day off from it… so part
of that is I have to have the problem
<when trigger situation occurs>. But –
you have to teach me how to do it. What
do I do inside my head in order to <have
the problem>?"
"What do I do inside
my head?" frames the
problem as something
they do (and can stop
doing). "Teach me how
to do it" dissociates
them from the
problem and makes
them the "expert".
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 301 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
3. When they answer, act dumb: "OK, so
someone's late and I see a picture in my
mind of them in trouble. Do I see a
small black and white snapshot?" (client
may answer "No, it has to be big and
colourful with horrible sound!")
"OK, so to have the problem properly I
should avoid picturing a small black and
white snapshot."
Client has to try out
the "wrong" version of
the strategy to check if
it works.
4. Repeat for each step of the strategy,
using 'defusing' submodalities on each
step.
Continue until you can reproduce the
problem in yourself.
This creates
alternative pathways
for each step of the
strategy.
Further reading
The key text for this exercise is Richard Bandler's
Magic In Action.
Use this exercise for:
-Therapy Skills, -Coaching Skills
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 302 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Eliciting Relaxation Strategy
Duration: 15 minutes each way
Objectives:
• Participants gain experience in eliciting strategy
• Participants learn more about their own strategy for
relaxation
Procedure
In pairs - Exemplar and Eliciter
Eliciter discovers Exemplar's strategy for relaxing. The Exemplar
may be pretty relaxed by the end of the elicitation, so break state!
Then Eliciter feeds back the steps of the strategy, in tonality that
follows that of the Exemplar, and calibrating that each step is
actually happening, until Exemplar re-accesses their relaxed state.
Then wake Exemplar up if needed and swap roles.
As most people's strategies for relaxing are fairly linear, you
could do this without the group needing to know the TOTE model
first.
Clear up
How did that go?
Eliciters - how easy was it to get the strategy?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 303 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Exemplars - what have you discovered about your relaxation
strategy?
What did your Eliciter do that particularly helped you to relax?
Future pace
How will you use your strategy elicitation skills in the future?
Exemplars - how will explicitly knowing your relaxation strategy
help you in the future?
Use this exercise for:
-Hypnosis
Note: I believe this exercise originates with Nick Driscoll, from the
early days of the Richmond NLP Group.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 304 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
"Disney Strategy" For Creativity
Timing: say 20 minutes per round – left to itself it will go on
longer.
Objectives
• Participants gain a strategy for creativity and creative problem
solving
• Participants get some solutions for some problem or options
for a project
Procedure
In pairs, "client" and coach.Use the “Disney Strategy” handout.
Client thinks of some problem they want to solve or project they
want to implement.
Mark out "Dreamer", "Implementer" and "Critic" spaces on the
floor.
Coach guides client through each of the spaces – Dreamer for
ideas, Implementer for how to put them into practice, and Critic
for what could go wrong and reasons why the idea wouldn't work.
Recycle through the spaces as many times as you need to in order
to arrive at some workable solutions.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 305 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Variation
For additional NLP-ness you can get the client to access particular
modes of thinking in each stage:
Dreamer - Vc
Implementer - K
Critic - Ad
Clear up
What did you discover?
When are you going to use this?
Note: This process was developed by Robert Dilts, who based it
on the way Walt Disney used to organise his creative teams to
come up with ideas. It's detailed in Dilt's book Strategies of
Genius Vol. 1, which also has ideas drawn from the thought
processes, as far as they can be modelled, of Aristotle, Mozart,
and Sherlock Holmes (!)
There is a lot more about using the Disney Strategy on the
Coaching Leaders blog at http://coachingleaders.co.uk/blog/nlp-
the-disney-strategy-for-creativity.html.
Use this exercise for:
-Creativity, -Decision Making, -Problem Solving
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 306 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Walking In Another's Shoes
Timing: 5 minutes per round, plus clear-up
Objectives:
• Participants experience the world from a different perspective
• Participants add to behavioural flexibility
• Participants gain greater unconscious understanding of each
other
• (If doing this exercise with 'civilians' around) participants
become less concerned about what others think
Procedure
In pairs - 'Exemplar' and 'Modeller'.
NB this is a silent exercise. Best to do this when it isn't raining.
You can introduce this by quoting the Native American saying
that you don't truly understand someone until you have walked a
mile in their moccasins (or if you want to lighten things up, the
variant "Don't criticise someone until you've walked a mile in
their moccasins - that way, when you do criticise them, you're a
mile away and you've got their moccasins"). Or the (apparently)
New Guinea proverb "Knowledge is only a rumour until it is in the
muscle."
Exemplar takes a walk outside the training room, just being
themselves and doing whatever they might do when taking a
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 307 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
walk. Modeller follows a few paces behind (far enough away that
they do not unduly affect Exemplar's behaviour) and 'becomes'
Exemplar - matching as closely as possible the gait, posture, and
actions of the Exemplar.
Swap after 5 minutes, without pausing to unpack the experience.
Come back to the training room when you've gone both ways.
Clear up
What did you discover?
What was it like 'being' the other person?
What do you want to keep from the other person's way of being or
behaving?
Use this exercise for:
-Interpersonal Skills, -Emotional Intelligence
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 308 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Walking In Another's Shoes (with
coach)
Timing: 5 minutes per round, plus clear-up
Objectives:
As previously, plus:
• Modellers get even closer to 'becoming' the Exemplars
• Coaches hone their observational skills
Procedure:
3 people - Exemplar, Modeller, Coach
You could follow this on from the previous exercise (use different
Exemplar-Modeller pairs)
Exemplar takes a walk outside the training room, just being
themselves and doing whatever they might do when taking a
walk. Modeller follows a few paces behind (far enough away that
they do not unduly affect Exemplar's behaviour) and 'becomes'
Exemplar - matching as closely as possible the gait, posture, and
actions of the Exemplar.
Coach assists the Modeller in matching the Exemplar even more
closely.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 309 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Swap after 5 minutes, without pausing to unpack the experience.
Come back to the training room when everyone has had an
experience of all three roles.
Clear up
If running this exercise as a stand-alone, use questions from
previous exercise. If following on, use just these additional
questions:
What did you notice as the Coach?
Modellers - what was different after implementing the Coach's
suggestions?
Modellers - what did you get from comparing your experiences of
modelling the two exemplars?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 310 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Deep Physical Rapport
Timing: at least 5 minutes per round
Objectives:
• Participants have an experience of gaining insight into
another's experience (thoughts, feelings, beliefs, or even
memories) through deep physical rapport
What to say beforehand (Whys)
We pick up a lot of information about other people unconsciously
- this can include what they are feeling, what's going on for them,
and even sometimes what they are thinking about. That's been
my experience anyway.
When you match someone's physiology, it opens the way to
making this information available. Would you like to experiment
with a way of doing this?
Procedure
Briefly demonstrate with two volunteers and yourself as Coach.
Three participants: Exemplar, Modeller and Coach.
This exercise is best done standing up. Experiencer and Matcher
are silent to aid concentration.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 311 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Examplar and Modeller stand opposite each other at a
comfortable distance.
Exemplar recalls a powerful pleasant experience (I generally ask
participants to stay out of the boudoir area when choosing the
experience). The aim is that the Exemplar associates back into the
experience and relives it. It's OK for Exemplars to close their eyes
as this often helps in fully reassociating.
Modeller mirrors the Exemplar as closely as they can. The Coach
looks at both participants (using peripheral vision at least some
of the time) and assists Modeller to get even deeper into non-
verbal rapport (any verbal instructions to be given very quietly so
as not to disturb the Exemplar).
The Coach can be particularly helpful in noticing aspects of the
Exemplar's physiology that Exemplar would find it hard to see
from front-on - for example, viewing Exemplar from the side and
imagining a line from the top of the head down through the spine
and legs to the feet can be very helpful in noticing the angles of
neck, spine, hips and knees.
When the Modeller has got as much from the visual information
as possible, continue to match with eyes closed (if Exemplar's
eyes are closed).
After at least five minutes of deep mirroring, Coach gently brings
back Exemplar and Modeller and asks the Modeller what came to
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 312 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
them about the Exemplar's recalled experience. What did it feel
like? What was going on for them? What was the experience?
Clear up
(primarily to Modellers) What did you notice? How close did you
get to guessing the experience?
What to expect
In a group of 12, typically you might get 2 people who get
spookily close to identifying the actual experience (e.g. ski-ing,
getting married, lying on a tropical beach), 2 people who don't get
anywhere near, and the rest somewhere in between, identifying
what the Exemplar was feeling or something about the experience
(e.g. high up).
The proportions of success should go up depending on how well
you have taught matching - see if you can beat my usual score!
With practice you can gather a lot of information about what is
going on for a client just by spending a moment in their shoes.
Note: I first encountered this exercise in a workshop at the UK NLP Conference by Eric Robbie - http://www.nlpconnections.com/members/ericrobbie.html is the only website I can find for him!.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 313 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
"Speed Modelling" 1
Timing: 25 minutes in total
Prerequisites: None, although people will notice more the more
NLP training they've had. People who have had no NLP training
will still get a lot from it.
Objectives:
• Participants tune up their sensory acuity
• Participants get to know each other better
• Participants discover some new information about their own
abilities and how they do something that they're good at
What to say (Whys)
As for objectives above - you can frame the exercise as a tune-up,
or as an introduction to modelling.
Procedure
6 participants, made up of 'Exemplar' and 'Modeller' pairs. You
can have more as long as it's an even number.
Chairs in a triad facing out, 3 more chairs facing in (so pairs)
Inner circle (Exemplars): talk about something you do well for 3
minutes (Modeller can question) – then 2 minutes feedback from
Modeller on what you noticed.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 314 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Rotate twice (Exemplars stay put, Modellers move round) – use a
different ability each time.
Clear up
(after each round)
What was it like?
Exemplars – what did you notice about yourself?
Modellers – what works/doesn't work in elicitation?
On 3rd clear up – Exemplars – what did you get from each round?
What was the common thread in each ability?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 315 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
"Speed Modelling" 2
Timing: 25 minutes in total
Objectives
As for Speed Modelling 1
Procedure
This exercise works best following straight on from Speed
Modelling 1.
(As for Speed Modelling 1 - swap them round so that Exemplars
from the first exercise are now Modellers, and vice versa. Mix
them into different pairs if possible)
6 participants, made up of 'Exemplar' and 'Modeller' pairs. You
can have more as long as it's an even number.
Chairs in a triad facing out, 3 more chairs facing in (so pairs)
The essential difference is that we are modelling the same
ability in each round, rather than three different abilities.
First round: Inner circle (Exemplars): talk about something you do
well for 3 minutes (Modeller can question) – then 2 minutes
feedback from Modeller on what you noticed. (as in Speed
Modelling 1)
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 316 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Second round: Exemplars stay put, Modellers move round one. As
Round One, plus "how do you know you're good at this?"
Third round: Modellers move round again. As Round one, plus
"What makes the difference between a good or OK session of
using your skill, and an excellent one?"
Clear up
Modellers: how did you know what questions to ask?
Exemplars: what did you get from each round?
Note: This exercise is based on my hazy recollection of one that I experienced in a session run by Sue Knight (www.sueknight.com) at the NLP Conference in London a few years back. Subsequently I've used this exercise as part of the Modelling segment of my NLP Master Practitioner course, plus I've also run it as an NLP practice group session where the participants included many people with no prior NLP training - so it works at any level of experience.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 317 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Modelling The Timeline
Timing: 50 minutes altogether
Objectives:
• Participants become more skilled at modelling
• Participants learn more about their own timelines
• Participants experience taking on some of another person's
experience of the world
What to say beforehand (Whys)
The timeline is a vital component of how an individual
experiences the world. Would you like to know how to elicit the
submodalities of the timeline, and have an undeniable experience
of 'trying on' another person's way of experiencing time?
Procedure
(Optional, if group is not familiar with timelines): as a group,
trainer guides them through timeline elicitation and 'test driving'
the time line.
In threes – Exemplar, Modeller, Observer
1. Modeller elicits timeline – direction, submodalities etc.
Observer and exemplar feed back on elicitation
2. Observer, assisted by exemplar, installs timeline in Modeller
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 318 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
3. Modeller reports what it was like
4. Observer feeds back what they noticed from calibration.
Modeller checks with Exemplar that their experience was
accurate.
Clear up after each round. Rotate until everyone has experienced
each role.
Clear up
What happened when you tried on the new timeline?
What (if any) aspects of the new timeline are you going to keep?
What works/doesn't work in the elicitation process?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 319 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Who Are You When You're At Your Best?
Timing: 10 minutes per round
Objectives:
• Participants reconnect with 'best self' and gain an anchor to
reconnect with it at any time
• Participants develop their sensory acuity
Procedure
Demo this, if you are pretty confident in your own sensory acuity,
or just let people try it out. Can do with two participants
(Explorer and Coach) or add an Observer.
Coach asks Explorer: "Who are you when you are at your best?"
and notices non-verbal responses. Ask the question as many
different ways as you need to in order to keep Explorer focused.
The object is for the Explorer to reach a specific kind of peak
state, connecting with their 'best self' - who they essentially are.
Coach notices non-verbal responses - where Explorer looks,
gestures, indications that Explorer is seeing or touching 'external
representations' in surrounding perceptual space, tonal
variations, particular words or phrases (OK I know that's not non-
verbal), and so on. It's OK for Explorer to go into content -
provided the content is about when they are at their best, it will
help them to associate into their 'best self'.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 320 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Coach can replay the non-verbals to help the Explorer to remain
in or recapture 'best self' state, and anchor it using whichever
modality or combination of modalities seems best.
Break state, and test the anchor. Future pace: when will you
reconnect with your best self? When will it help you?
Observer (if present) can feed back on what they observed in the
elicitation process.
Swap roles (the Explorer may need a couple of minutes to 'come
down' from the best self experience).
Clear up
What did you learn from that experience?
What are you going to do differently as a result of what you have
learned?
How are you going to be differently as a result of what you have
learned?
This can be a profound experience for the Explorer - depending
on the skill and sensory acuity of the Coach. At the same time, it's
not a risky procedure, as the focus is on the positive at all times
and we're not delving into problems.
Note: This exercise is based on my (doubtless patchy) recollection of a demonstration by Joseph Riggio of his Mythogenic Self process back in the mid-to-late 90s. Joseph's sensory acuity during the elicitation process was exquisite. More information at www.mythoself.com
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 321 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Modelling Your Future Self
Timing: about 30 minutes altogether
Objectives:
• Participants gain more confidence in their future
• Participants become clearer about their internal
representations of the future
• Participants gain easier access to their own inner resources
Procedure
Two participants: Explorer, Modeller (optionally, Observer)
(Optionally) demo this.
Explorer lays their timeline out on the floor.
Modeller elicits where the Explorer 's ideal future self (as the
Explorer wants to be) is on the timeline.
Modeller guides Explorer to step into the ideal future self and
fully associate.
Modeller elicits any submodality changes in the timeline, any
specific events, how it feels, etc.
"What advice do you have for the 'you' back there in the present?"
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 322 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Modeller guides Explorer to "Come back to now, bringing
everything you liked about that experience with you, only as
quickly as your unconscious mind learns whatever you need to
learn from each event along the way."
Observer (if present) feeds back on the elicitation process. Rotate
roles.
Clear up
What did you learn from that experience?
What are you going to do differently as a result of what you have
learned?
How are you going to be differently as a result of what you have
learned?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 323 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Presentation Skills
Use any of the exercises in this section for:
-Presentation Skills
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 324 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Outcome Focus
Timing: 5 minutes each way - 15 in total
Objectives:
• Participants clarify their outcomes for presenting (for a
particular presentation or in general)
• Participants turn their attention towards outcomes, away
from how they are feeling, and become more confident as a
result
Procedure
In pairs, or just take the whole group through it for quick version
Think of some context for presenting where you are not as
confident and resourceful as you would like to be - this could be
an upcoming event, or a something you would like to do but have
held back from doing through lack of confidence. (NB for
participants who claim to be completely confident whenever they
present, it's worth exploring if they could raise their game and
present to larger or more challenging audiences).
Fully associate into that experience - imagine presenting. Notice
what you see, hear, feel. How do you stand? What does your voice
sound like? What internal dialogue do you have? What's its
tonality?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 325 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Come back - how did that feel? How confident did you feel on a
scale of 1-10?
Now think about your outcome for that presentation. What do
you want to happen? What will tell you that your presentation has
been successful? Take a couple of minutes to explore this.
Imagine that you are looking back on the successful conclusion of
your presentation - how does that feel? Any anxiety - or has it
gone?
Come back to now.
Now - staying focused on your desired outcome - imagine doing
that presentation. Fully associate into that experience while
staying focused on your outcome.
Notice what you see, hear, feel as you present. How do you stand?
What does your voice sound like? What internal dialogue do you
have? What's its tonality?
Come back - how did that feel? How confident did you feel on a
scale of 1-10?
Clear up
What happened?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 326 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
What differences did you notice between the first 'presentation'
and presenting while focused on your outcome?
What was the difference between where you started out on the
confidence scale and where you are now?
What are you going to do differently as a result of what you've
learned?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 327 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Qualities of a Compelling and Credible
Presenter
Timing: Part 1 - 5 minutes
Part 2 - 5-10 minutes each way
Objectives:
• Participants clarify their internal representation of the
qualities (and hence behaviours) of a compelling and credible
presenter
• Participants gain experience in embodying these qualities (not
just thinking or talking about them)
• Participants become more compelling and credible as
presenters
What to say beforehand (Whys)
When presenting to a group (especially in a business context)
there's something even more important than rapport. Before you
establish rapport, you have to establish credibility.
The unconscious minds of the audience will pick up on your body
language and voice tone, as well as other markers like the way
you are dressed in the context, and start making assessments of
your credibility (Is this person to be believed? Do they know what
they are talking about? Should I even bother paying attention?) as
soon as you walk out in front of them. The way you demonstrate
credibility in your physiology and tonality is at least as important
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 328 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
as your qualifications on paper. Would you like to improve your
unconscious credibility as a compelling presenter?
Procedure
In pairs - 'Explorer' and 'Guide'
Part 1 (5 minutes): What does a compelling and credible
presenter look like? Sound like? How do they 'make you' feel? (or
for 'cause and effect' purists - How do you feel when you see and
hear a compelling and credible presenter?)
Part 1 (optional) group clear up: What qualities did you identify?
Write them up.
Part 2 (5-10 minutes each way): Each pick one quality. Guide
coaches Explorer in embodying their chosen quality.
How does <quality> stand?
How does it walk?
How does it look the audience in the eye?
At what pace and pitch does it speak?
Where do you feel that quality in your body?
And if you take that quality and increase it even more, what's that
like? (Guide coaches Explorer in increasing that quality, and
optionally assists Explorer in anchoring the quality - allow some
extra time if you are doing this).
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 329 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Clear up
What's different now?
What did your Guide ask or say or do that was most helpful?
What changes did you notice in the Explorer?
What are you going to do differently in your next presentation?
Note: this exercise is adapted from one in Alan Mar’s very useful little book Presenter: Be Your Best... and Beyond
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 330 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Energy Bubble 1
Timings: 5 minutes
Objectives:
• Participants experiment with an altered 'uptime' state of
awareness
• Participants learn a useful de-stressing technique for paying
attention to all aspects of their experience (rather than
blinkered narrow focus)
Prerequisites: Centering and Peripheral Vision
Procedure
Demo this with volunteer.
Become aware of your centre. Now, would you like to become
even more centred, and even more able to respond resourcefully,
whatever happens around you?
Imagine a bubble of energy emanating from your central point,
like a science-fiction force-field all around you, so that anything
that happens outside, no matter how stressful, just bounces off
and away from you (mime something bouncing off the energy
bubble with your hand). And I don't know how you see it, or hear
it, or feel it... just notice where the boundaries of the bubble are.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 331 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
I'm not suggesting that you really do have a bubble of energy
round you - but if you imagine you have, your unconscious mind
will behave as if you have something protecting you from
anything that you have previously perceived as stressful.
And notice how it's not just a barrier - it's also where the edge of
your personal space is, so you can notice things all around you,
and let them through the bubble if you wish.
(To the group): I'd like you to stand up, and project your bubble
now. Experiment with walking around the room, only as quickly
as you can maintain your energy bubble. Notice when the edges
of your bubble brush against someone else's, and what else you
notice when you're in this state.
Bring them back after a few minutes.
Clear up
What did you notice?
When might this be useful?
Use this exercise for:
-Stress Management, -Confidence, -Self-Esteem
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 332 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Energy Bubble 2
Timing: about 2 minutes per participant
Objectives:
• Participants learn technique for making audience members
feel included, and within their 'sphere of influence'
• Participants find it easier to pay attention to the whole
audience and project to the back of the room
• Participants become more confident with standing in front of
an audience, and more comfortable with silence
Procedure
Each participant in turn stands in front of the audience and
notices how that feels (with large groups, you could split them
into audiences of 12 or so).
Trainer guides 'presenter' through becoming aware of their own
'energy bubble', then extending their energy bubble to fill the
room - in front (to the wall behind the audience), all the way out
behind, and above.
Now bring the energy bubble in from that back wall, to 'hug' the
audience, so that everyone feels included, and they are in your
sphere of influence. Just stand in front of the audience and
experience that for a while.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 333 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
You could treat the first participant as a demo, and clear up after
the first one. Continue until everyone has had a turn.
Clear up
What did you notice when you projected your energy bubble?
(expect increased confidence and awareness of the audience)
Audience - what did you notice before and after they projected
their energy bubble? (often audience members will report that
they felt more included, or that the presenter appeared to have
more 'presence' or charisma when the bubble was projected)
What are you going to do differently as a result of what you have
learned?
Note: This exercise, and some of the others in this section, are based on exercises I experienced on NLP Trainer Training with Tad James and David Shephard. You can find many of the Trainer Training exercises as Tad and David code them in their very useful book Presenting Magically.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 334 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Awareness Of The Group
Timing: 3 minutes per participant
Objectives:
• Participants practice their group awareness using peripheral
vision
• Participants hone their sensory acuity, becoming more aware
of non-verbal responses of the group
What to say beforehand (Whys)
Presenting is not a one-way process like broadcasting - there's a
feedback loop involved, so you need to pay attention to your
audience.
Procedure
In groups of 6-8. This is a silent exercise.
'Audience' stands in a horseshoe shape at a comfortable distance
around the 'Presenter', who goes into peripheral vision.
The task of the Presenter is to point at any audience member who
moves.
The task of the Audience members is to move without being
detected.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 335 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
After 3 minutes, Presenter rejoins the Audience, and an Audience
member becomes the new Presenter - until everyone has
experienced the Presenter role.
Clear up
What did you notice?
What do you want to ask, or share, or say?
NB this is usually quite a fun exercise.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 336 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Rapport With The Group
Timing: about 3 minutes per participant
Objectives:
• Participants develop their ability to connect non-verbally with
everyone in the audience
• Participants develop their sensory acuity
• Participants become more practiced and therefore more
comfortable with silence in front of an audience
What to say beforehand (Whys)
You need to establish rapport with your audience, so your
message comes across more clearly - and an audience in rapport
with you are more forgiving. But how do you know when you have
rapport with the audience?
Here's an exercise for both your conscious mind and your
unconscious mind to help you notice when you have rapport with
your audience.
Procedure
Divide into groups of 8-12. This is a silent exercise.
'Presenter' stands in front of audience. Audience members raise a
hand when they feel the Presenter is in rapport with them. If they
feel the Presenter has lost rapport, put your hand down.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 337 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Presenter stands still (though you can change your facial
expression and the direction of your gaze).
The exercise ends when every audience member has a hand
raised. Repeat until everyone in the group has been a Presenter.
Clear up
Audience - what did the Presenter do that helped them to achieve
rapport with you?
What did they do that lost rapport? (be prepared for the
respondents to not know consciously what behaviours
contributed to rapport - this is an opportunity to reflect on it)
Presenters - what did you do to achieve rapport with your
audience? NB they may not consciously know - as above. You can
help them out by asking about internal dialogue, where their
attention was, breathing, posture, facial expressions, and so on.
Presenters - how did you know when someone was about to raise
their hand?
Rapport with the group still works around a conference table, or
on a conference phone call or video call.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 338 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Hypnosis and Milton Model
Top tip
My big tip for teaching hypnosis is to teach self-hypnosis first.
That way, students are familiar with the trance state within
themselves before they try to induce it in others, are more
comfortable with trance, and are confident they can bring
themselves out of it.
Also, most NLP practitioner students are not going to go on to be
professional hypnotherapists or, heaven forbid, stage hypnotists,
whereas teaching them self-hypnosis gives them a valuable tool
they can use for their own personal development for the rest of
their lives.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 339 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Uptime and downtime
Timing: 5 minutes
Objectives:
• Participants become aware of the differences between 'uptime'
and 'downtime' states
• Participants become more aware of their own state changes
• This process makes a good preliminary to teaching hypnosis,
as the fractionation effect of switching repeatedly between
uptime and downtime will tend to make participants go
deeper each time they enter downtime
Procedure
Do this with the whole group.
Ask the class to open their eyes and be aware of what they can
see.
Now ask them to close their eyes. What's different? Obviously it's
darker, but what are they hearing? What are they feeling? What
are they tasting or smelling? Notice the differences between 'eyes
wide open' and 'eyes closed' states. What are they?
Tell the group to open and close their eyes as many times as they
need to in order to notice everything that's worth noticing about
the difference between the two states.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 340 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Clear up
What differences did you notice?
You may find that some participants tend to go deeper into
downtime each time they enter it.
Explain the concepts of 'uptime' (attention outside yourself, aware
of everything around you) and 'downtime' (attention inside
yourself, aware of feelings).
When might uptime be a useful state? (driving, playing sport,
seeing clients, anything involving other people)
When might downtime be useful? (reflection, thinking time, being
aware of your own emotions and motivations)
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 341 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Simple Self-Hypnosis Using Breathing
Timing: 5 minutes
Objectives:
• Participants have an introductory experience of the trance
state
• Participants gain a simple self-hypnosis induction that they
can also use to assist others into trance
What to say beforehand
If using this as part of a hypnosis or self-hypnosis course, you
need to have discovered what the participants think hypnosis is,
so as to address popular fears and misconceptions about
hypnosis, such as:
• "I will be in someone else's power" (no you won't, you can
come out of the trance state at any time)
• "I will be out of control" (when you are in a trance state you
are more in control - cite examples of people who have had
operations using hypnosis instead of anaesthetic)
• "I don't want to let my unconscious mind off the leash
because I'm scared of it" (your unconscious mind is your
friend)
• "I won't be able to be hypnotised" (all hypnosis is self-
hypnosis, so it's up to you - and if everyone is in a trance state
all the time, you are already in a trance anyway, so just notice
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 342 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
whatever changes you notice, since as Milton Erickson said,
going into trance is about noticing that you are going into
trance)
Participants need to understand that hypnosis is a natural state,
that we go through it at least twice a day as a minimum (when we
wake up and when we fall asleep), and in fact, if a trance state is a
state in which we are more focused on some things and less
aware of others, when are we ever not in a trance of one kind or
another?
You can point out examples of supposed "deep trance
phenomena" that happen every day - such as amnesia (missing
your exit while driving on the motorway), analgesia (realising you
have a paper cut but not knowing when it happened), negative
hallucination (not being able to find your keys and sometime later
discovering them in plain sight on the table), age regression
(being reprimanded by some authority figure and feeling like you
are a little kid again), time distortion (time dragging by in the
dentist's waiting room, or whizzing by when you are engaged in
an interesting conversation or a fascinating piece of work).
"Don't expect to 'be hypnotised' or have strange things happen
(although they might), do expect to be pleasantly relaxed. So,
would you like to start to explore trance, only as deeply as you
want to go into trance now?"
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 343 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Alternatively, you can use this exercise on non-hypnosis courses
and just introduce it as a simple relaxation method - which it is.
Procedure
Talk the group through this induction - use a relaxing tonality
and pause where you see ellipsis (...):
Now just begin to relax, and sit comfortably and symmetrically in
your chair so you can hold yourself upright with a mimimum of
muscular effort (NB model this for them)... and close your eyes...
and be aware of your breathing... and you don't have to change
your breathing in any way at all... although your breathing may
change... all by itself... maybe gradually breathing slower... and
deeper... all by itself... or maybe taking a deep breath and letting
it out... all by itself... and all your conscious mind has to do... is be
aware of your breathing as it flows in... and out... and any time
you may feel your attention wandering, just bring it back to focus
on your breathing... and because you're now more relaxed... you
may notice certain pleasant sensations... and notice things that
you normally overlook... like the way the cool air flows over your
upper lip as you breathe in... and it will feel warmer as you
breathe out... and I wonder if your attention can follow each in-
breath... a little bit deeper down each time... a little bit deeper
down... until pretty soon... your attention can follow each breath...
all the way... deep down... inside...
(pause for as long as you like - then return:)
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 344 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
And it's almost time to begin to come back now... and just before
you do... remember that next time you choose to relax in this
way... you can relax more quickly... more easily... more deeply...
each time you choose to relax in this way... so now... bringing
everything that you've liked about this back with you... just begin
to come back to full waking consciousness... as your energy levels
rise... you feel more alert... starting to move and stretch a little...
and open your eyes, feeling refreshed, alert and fully awake, as if
you've just had a deep, refreshing sleep. And welcome back!
(Note - you can begin to speed up a little from 'begin to come
back to full waking consciousness', to bring the audience back up
to speed with their normal waking experience.
Clear up
NB make sure everyone is back and has their eyes open: "I know
some of you may not want to come back now but come back now
anyway! - because you will have plenty of opportunities to
explore the trance state (or relaxation) as we go on."
What did you notice?
What was I saying? (some people may not remember, which is a
sign that they are excellent trance subjects)
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 345 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
When could you use this? (any time you want to relax deeply, and -
depending on the audience and how you have framed the exercise
- any time they want to help others to relax)
What are you going to do differently as a result of what you've
learned?
Point out that any self-hypnosis method can also be used to guide
someone else into trance - as you have just done.
Variations
After this exercise, you can invite participants to silently run
themselves through the same process while you shut up. This
demonstrates that they are putting themselves into trance rather
than the effect being due to the "hypnotic power of your voice".
Follow up as before - usually you will find that some people
found it harder without your voice to guide them
(understandably, as it's nearly always easier to have another
competent person guide you through an NLP or hypnotic
procedure), while others go deeper, perhaps because it's the
second time round.
Use this exercise for:
-Stress Management
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 346 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
"That's Right"
Timing: 5 minutes each round
Objectives:
• Participants experience trance
• Participants become more aware of signs of trance
• Participants become more skilled in trance induction and
build their confidence
• Participants become aware of the principle of behavioural
reinforcement and how to use it
What to say beforehand
Talk about the concept of 'everyday trance' and Ernest Rossi's
'basic rest and activity cycle'. Milton Erickson would use this
principle by noticing any signs of trance that occurred naturally
in his clients while he was talking to them. If he wanted them to
go into trance he would encourage them by saying "That's right".
In this way he could assist people into trance without a formal
trance induction.
Saying "That's right" (or using some other verbal or non-verbal
encouragement) whenever you observe a sign of trance provides
behavioural reinforcement to the client's unconscious mind,
encouraging it to do more of that behaviour.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 347 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Procedure
Two participants - Explorer and Guide. Guide says "That's right"
whenever the Explorer shows a sign of relaxation. Otherwise, this
is a silent exercise. Continue until the Explorer is in trance. Then
come out of trance and swap.
Clear up
How did that go?
What was particularly helpful or effective about your guide?
Don't get hung up on having to say "That's right". Erickson was a
middle aged to elderly psychiatrist in an age when people had a
lot more deference to authority figures. In some contexts, saying
"That's right" could come across as patronising - in fact there are
ways of saying it that could make it come across as patronising in
pretty much any context. So use your judgement - you could use
any encouraging phrase (or non-verbal expression of
encouragement) as long as it's appropriate and you stick to the
same one.
Note: This exercise is adapted from one in the book Training Trances by John Overdurf and Julie Silverthorn. This book is a must for trainers, especially of NLP, and for serious students of Ericksonian hypnosis.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 348 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Pacing Current Experience
Timing: 5 minutes per round
Objectives:
• Experience trance
• Become more skilled in trance induction and build confidence
confidence
• Recognise the importance of pacing
• Practice calibration
• Practice voice matching, timing, and smooth delivery
Procedure
For groups of 5-8 people, seated in a circle with an Explorer
sitting in the middle.
Each person in the circle in turn makes a statement that has to be
true for the Explorer, so it paces their experience (e.g. "You can
feel the chair against your back"). Continue going round the circle
until the Explorer is well into trance. Then bring them back,
someone else goes in the middle, and repeat until everyone has
had a go.
Clear up
It's worth having a clear up session after the first round to help
students improve for subsequent rounds.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 349 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
To the Explorers: what really helped you to go into trance?
Often we find that statements that pace and utilise observed
signs of trance help the most - e.g. "You may find you want to
swallow", "Your eyelids are fluttering".
And was there anything that didn't help?
NB typical examples might be:
• A statement that did not pace the experience of the Explorer,
e.g. someone seated behind them saying "You can see the
window in front of you", not realising that the Explorer's eyes
have already closed.
• A long pause between one pacing statement and the next
• A jarring change in volume, tonality or rhythm between one
statement and the next.
This gives the students feedback to modify their delivery in the
next round.
Variation: for second and subsequent rounds, try joining the
statements with a simple conjunction: "You can see the wall in
front of you"... "and your breathing is slow and steady"... "and you
can hear the wind in the trees"... and so on.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 350 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Generate Embedded Suggestion
Settings
Timing: 15 minutes
Objectives:
• Become more aware of different ways to embed suggestions
• 'Own' and remember this knowledge more completely because
students have come up with it themselves
• Generate material for the Embedded Suggestions exercise that
follows
Procedure
Having introduced the students to the concept of embedded
suggestions (ideally using lots of embedded suggestions in your
delivery), ask them to think of naturalistic, conversational ways in
which they could deliver embedded suggestions.
Adding a bit of content will help some students to relate to the
exercise. So, ask them, in groups of 4 or 5, to come up with as
many different phrases as possible in which to embed
suggestions for (e.g.) confidence. Ask them to write the examples
down as we will be using them later.
Start off with some examples, such as:
"I wouldn't want to suggest that you will feel confident using
embedded suggestions straight away"
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 351 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
"I wonder how you will find this - easy or not?"
"We find most people get confident with this after a while"
Clear up
What have you come up with? Which ones did you particularly
like? What are some elegant examples?
Suggest that each student keeps a notebook to note down good
examples of embedded suggestions as they think of them, read
about them, or overhear them.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 352 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Embedded Suggestion Practice
Timing: 5 minutes per round
Objectives:
• Become more confident at delivering embedded suggestions
conversationally
• Improve auditory matching
• Improve calibration of signs of trance
Procedure
In groups of 5-8 - Trance Explorer and Helpers. Make sure each
group has examples of embedded suggestion formats from the
preceding "Generate embedded suggestion settings" exercise, or
from other embedded suggestion format examples such as Zebu
Cards or Salad Hypnosis cards.
Trance Explorer sits in the centre of a circle of Helpers (NB
occasionally a student is uncomfortable having someone directly
behind them - the Explorer has the final say in where people sit).
Each Helper in turn delivers an embedded suggestion from their
list, aimed at assisting the Explorer into trance. Continue going
round the circle until the Explorer is in trance, then gently bring
them back.
Repeat until everyone has had a go at the Explorer role.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 353 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Clear up
It's worth doing a quick clear up with each group after the first
round.
Explorers - which suggestions, in terms of content or the way they
were delivered, helped you to go into trance?
Did anything not help? (Explorers may mention jarring changes of
tone, or long awkward pauses)
Use the feedback from the first round to improve performance in
the subsequent rounds.
Suggest that for subsequent rounds they use the simple
conjunction 'and' to join each suggestion to the previous one.
When students are reasonably fluent (after a couple of rounds),
suggest that they ask if the Explorer would like suggestions to
help with anything in particular (e.g. confidence, concentration,
sleeping better, etc).
Variation: if using Zebu or Salad cards, you could follow the
suggestion in the card packs and incorporate delivering the
suggestions as part of a simple card game. Personally I have
found that the card games just add an extra level of distraction
and complication, and it's better to just deal out a few cards to
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 354 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
each person, give them a minute to get familiar with them, and
just pick a suggestion to deliver the next time it's their turn.
Another great product for practising generating Ericksonian
language patterns is Nigel Hetherington’s Hypnosis Language
Structure Mastery Cards, a new product which gets away from the
‘playing card’ concept altogether. It works better for solo study
than as a group game.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 355 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Handouts
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 356 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
What Is NLP? "The study of subjective experience"
Neuro the nervous system - the mind and the sensory organs with which we receive and filter information through our five senses
Linguistic the way we communicate and interpret experience through language, including body language, images, sounds, feelings, tastes and smells
Programming the way we construct personal programs of thought, communication and behaviour Neuro-Linguistic Programming (NLP) is the study of how we think and communicate, with ourselves and with others, and of how we can use this to get the results we want. The heart of NLP is modelling behaviour - the techniques which are commonly thought of as making up NLP are just the results of that modelling. NLP has been defined as:
The ability to master your own states by running your own brain - Richard Bandler
The study of excellence and how to reproduce it - John Grinder
An attitude (wanton curiosity) and methodology (modelling) that leaves behind a trail of techniques - Richard Bandler
The process of creating models of human excellence in which usefulness, not truthfulness (of the model), is the most important criterion for success - NLP Comprehensive
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 357 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
The Three Pillars of NLP
To get the results you want, you need remember only three things: 1. Know what you want; have a clear idea of your desired
outcome in any situation.
2. Be alert and keep your senses open (sensory awareness or acuity) so that you notice what results you’re getting.
3. Have the flexibility to go on changing what you do until you get what you want.
When dealing with people, this needs to happen in a context of rapport. If you go on doing what you’ve always done, you’ll always get what you always got, so:
If what you’re doing is not working, do something different!
R A P P O R T
A
W
A
R
E
N
E
S
S
F
L
E
X
I
B
I
L
I
T
Y
O
U
T
C
O
M
E
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 358 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
14 Presuppositions Of NLP Presuppositions are statements that you have to accept as true in order to make sense of something. You don't have to believe them, but you will only get good results with NLP when you act "as if" they are true. About people
• The map is not the territory
• Mind and body are one system
• The only reliable information about a person is behaviour
• A person’s behaviour is not who they are
• All behaviour is the best choice currently available
• I am in charge of my mind, and therefore my results
• People have all the inner resources they need to succeed (there are no unresourceful people, only unresourceful states)
About communication and assisting others with change
• Respect for the other person’s model of the world
• “Resistance” is only a lack of rapport
• The subsystem with the most flexibility has the most influence over the system (“Law of Requisite Variety”)
• There is no failure, only feedback
• The “meaning” of communication is the response you get
• All procedures should increase choice and wholeness
• Change should be evaluated in terms of context and ecology Adapted from Richard Bolstad’s book “Transforming Communication”, available from www.transformations.net.nz. Used with permission.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 359 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Present State and Desired State
One way of thinking about any kind of change is to regard it as a movement from the 'present state' (how things are now) to a 'desired state' (how you want things to be). In a person, the 'state' is the total gestalt of thoughts, feelings, and physical processes (physiology is the term often used for physical state in NLP). In order to get from present state to desired state, we may need to apply resources. These can be new beliefs, new actions, evoking positive emotions, money, a new physical environment - anything that will bring about the desired change. It is important to be clear about what the desired state is, and that we really want it. If we are not sure of our motivation, this may be a sign that the 'ecology' of the desired state (the effect it will have on the whole life of the person and the systems of which they are a part) may need attention.
Present
State
Desired
State
Resource
s
Thoughts Feelings Physiology
Ecology Frame
Thoughts Feelings Physiology
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 360 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
The Map Is Not The Territory
Your internal filters introduce:
" Deletions (we pay attention to what we are interested in)
" Distortions (we look for patterns and connections)
" Generalisations (we look for commonality and predictability)
F
I
L
T
E
R
S
INTERNAL
REPRESENTATION
STATE
Physiological
Emotional
Mental
Spiritual
BEHAVIOUR
RESULTS
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 361 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Sensory Acuity - (V.I.B.E.S.) Some of the things you can notice about people's responses Voice • speed • volume • pitch • tone • timbre • modulation • type of words used Inclination (of the spine; general posture and gesture) • slumped or straight • leaning forwards, upright or back • range and speed of gestures • symmetrical/asymmetrical to left or right Breathing • rate • depth • location in body Eyes • movements • pupil dilation • redness • watering • direction Skin • colour • muscle tone • size of areas (e.g. lips) • shiny/dull • goose-pimples
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 362 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Rapport Rapport - used in English to imply harmony, a feeling of shared
understanding, and of being at one - is the most important
process in any interaction. Without rapport, two people will not
trust each other and probably will not even hear each other
correctly.
We have all created rapport many times - when we’re with an old
friend, or when we meet someone and it feels like we’ve known
them all our lives. People tend to think it just happens, but we
can establish rapport deliberately.
• Rapport is a process, not a thing. Rapport is something we
do with another person.
• There are things we can do to establish rapport.
• Rapport is responsiveness - you don’t have to ‘like’ the other
person.
• Most communication is non-verbal!
• If you don’t have rapport, you won’t get your outcome. In
any conversation, neither of you will get anywhere until you
have established rapport.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 363 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
How Do We Establish Rapport?
A process called matching. You can match certain behaviours of the other person to establish rapport. People like people who are like them. Things you can match:
• Body posture: You’ll notice other people doing this unconsciously. However, use with care! People don’t like to be mimicked. Matching the angle of the spine works well and is not obvious.
• Breathing: Breathing has a rhythm, which you can match. It also can be deep or shallow, and people can breathe from the chest or the abdomen.
• Voice tone: Including volume, speed, tonality, and speech rhythms. Accent is probably best left alone!
• Movement rhythms (crossover matching): This is a slightly more complicated form of matching. You can match someone’s gestures with a different part of your body. People do things they are almost unaware of - scratching their chin, flicking their hair, crossing their legs - and you can match this subtly by some equally natural-looking movement like tapping a pencil or jiggling your foot.
Direct matching of gestures by doing the same thing can be counter-productive as people can spot it very easily. Rapport the easy way Just ask yourself: “What speed is this person running at?” - and match it. Responding to the other person is also vital - though not emphasised in "classic" NLP. When we respond to another person they feel heard and validated. Usually we do this naturally. Part of responsiveness is that you match (or crossover-match) people's gestures at the appropriate time – e.g. you don't match their gestures while they are talking!
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 364 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
How Do You Recognise Rapport?
1. You’ll feel it. Or get a sense of being at one with the other person. Conversely, if you lose rapport, or put a foot wrong, you’ll feel uncomfortable. We’ve all had that experience. But you can just do some more matching and get back into rapport again.
2. Pacing and leading. ‘Pacing’ is the word from NLP jargon
meaning matching someone, falling into step with them, entering into their model of the world. You can pace someone’s ideas, beliefs and experiences as well as their words and behaviour (you don’t have to share those ideas, you just have to fall into step with them for a while).
Human beings have a natural tendency to fall into step with each other. So after you have matched someone for a while, you can do something slightly different - slow your breathing down, uncross your legs, or scratch your nose - and if you have rapport, the other person will follow you. If they don’t, do some more matching.
3. Skin colour changes. When people feel relaxed, capillaries in
the skin dilate so the skin appears darker (in dark-skinned people) or pinker (in light-skinned people).
Is Pacing And Leading Manipulative?
In the long term, manipulative behaviour never works. Usually the other person will spot what the manipulator is trying to do because they seem ‘false’ or not fully human in their responses. Ultimately it depends on your intention. If you respect the other person and dovetail your desired outcome with theirs, you will get a win-win situation and everyone is satisfied. If not, neither party will achieve their outcome. Rapport works both ways - as you clear the channels of communication between you and the other person, you are opening yourself up to be influenced by them as well. So it’s important that you maintain yourself in a good state.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 365 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Practising Rapport
There are a number of ways you can practice and sharpen your rapport skills. If you actually do these exercises you will soon become better than most NLP master practitioners. • Notice examples of people in rapport around you - on the
train, in the pub, at work, anywhere that people gather. • Practise non-verbal rapport with strangers. You can
unobtrusively match someone’s posture or breathing (just as you have done unconsciously many times in the past). Don’t be surprised if they strike up a conversation with you.
• Choose a different aspect of rapport to practise every day,
or even for a week. One week you could do voice tone; when you’ve mastered that you could move on to breathing, then representational system, and so on.
• Watch TV. Notice the type of words that people on the TV are
using. Listen to the representational systems rather than the content. Does the character or presenter use mainly visual words, or mainly feeling, or what? Practise until you can spot the dominant representational system and get the content of what they are saying at the same time.
• When that gets too easy, rephrase what they are saying in a
different representational system. Never again will there be "nothing on the TV tonight".
What else could you match to achieve rapport?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 366 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Peripheral Vision Annotated Script
Move off to one side of
the group
You could cheat by
having a black spot
already fixed to the
wall in the
appropriate place
This is pacing their
current experience
but is also a
suggestion
Inviting them to re-
experience common
examples of ‘everyday
trance’
Now this is a visual technique, so I’m going to
get out of your line of sight, and just for a
while I want you to forget that rule of polite
society which says you have to look at
someone when they are talking to you. What I
want you to do instead is to get comfortable
and find a point on the wall which is straight
in front of you and slightly above your eye
level….
And just continue to look at that point in soft
focus, noticing everything about that point….
And after a while you may find that the rest of
the room gets a bit fuzzy or hazy and you get
a kind of tunnel vision….
And this way of looking at things, this tunnel
vision, is the way that we look at a lot of
things in modern society…. When you watch
TV, you don’t really notice the rest of the
room….When you are reading or writing, you
only notice the page…. Or when you are
working on a computer…. Even when we talk
to someone, we tend to look at their eyes or
face and ignore the rest of them…. And this
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 367 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Embedded command
– they have been
asked to do something
but don’t know what
it is yet, so they are
receptive to the
instructions that
follow
Lift your hands to the
side of your face to
show them what to do
A 180° field of vision
is not unusual –
sometimes more
way of looking at things also goes with a kind
of inner tunnel vision…. With obsession,
fixation, worry, stress, rushing around,
adrenaline…. But there is another way of
looking at things, and I’d like you to
experience that way now…. So as your eyes
continue to look at the same point, your eyes
don’t move, but you can begin to broaden out
your field of vision and notice what’s either
side of that point… and you may become more
aware of people either side of you... and your
field of vision can get wider and wider until
you’re really paying attention to what you can
see out of the corners of your eyes…. At the
periphery of your vision….
And you might be quite interested to find out
how far round your peripheral vision goes….
So if you lift your hands up to the side of
your face and wiggle your fingers – and
gradually move them backwards, you will
reach a point where you can see your fingers
when they're moving…. and not when they're
still…. And that is the periphery of your
vision….
And I’d like you to extend your awareness all
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 368 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Or am I?
Covering myself in
case it hasn’t
happened yet
Embedded command
the way around behind you…. Of course I’m
not suggesting you can see behind you…. But
just use your sense of hearing or spatial
awareness to be aware of what’s behind you as
well…. 360°…. And you may have noticed that
your breathing has slowed down a little….
Maybe the muscles of your face have
relaxed…. Perhaps especially your jaw
muscles…. And you can help them along as
much as you like….
And it’s probably a bit early for this to have
happened just yet…. But if you were to stay in
peripheral vision for any length of time….
You might find that your hands begin to get
warm…. Or even your feet…. But it’s probably
a little early for that to have happened just
yet…
And the really interesting thing about
peripheral vision…. Is that it seems to activate
the parasympathetic nervous system…. The
part of your nervous system that calms you
down…. And slows your breathing down….
And even your heartbeat slows down…. And
your mind and body and emotions can come
back into balance…. And your immune system
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 369 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Embedded suggestion
At this point you
could continue on into
trance
is boosted…. So this relaxed state…. Is just not
compatible with adrenaline…. So when you’re
really in peripheral vision…. You can’t be
stressed…. You can’t be worried….
And I don’t want you to go all the way deep
into this state now…. Because you’ll have lots
of opportunities to practice…. At home or at
work…. So I’d like you to begin to return to
normal waking consciousness now…. By
letting your field of vision narrow back
down….. and welcome back!
As the group or person goes into peripheral vision, and all the
time that they stay there, you can anchor the state with a gentle
up-and-down movement of your hand, in rhythm with your voice.
This anchor will serve as a non-verbal cue to assist them into
peripheral vision rapidly next time - you can use it as a
reinforcement of "go into peripheral vision", or even as a non-
verbal suggestion while you are talking about something else.
Of course, you could adapt this script to use as a trance induction
or to teach peripheral vision as a state-change technique to
clients, stress management classes, etc.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 370 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Peripheral Vision Desensitisation
For use when the client finds something stressful or uncomfortable to think of (NB for intense traumatic experiences, use some form of timeline emotional clearing such as Time Line Therapy™ for preference). 1. Guide the client into peripheral vision, using a gentle
up and down movement of the hand as an anchor. Calibrate to ensure their state has changed to calm, relaxed awareness, and bring them out.
2. Test by asking them to go into peripheral vision again,
and use the anchor. 3. When you are sure the client can enter peripheral
vision at will, ask them to think of the stressful incident or image. Ask them to rate the intensity of their response on a scale of 1 to 10.
4. Now ask them to think of the stressful incident or
image and at the same time go into peripheral vision (remember to use the anchor). When their state changes, bring them back. Ask them to rate their response again - it should have gone down.
5. Repeat until the response is down to a 1 or a zero. 6. Future pace - what will it be like next time they are in
that situation? The technique of using peripheral vision to come to terms with uncomfortable experiences or images was developed by Amy and Susan Chu.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 371 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Big Picture Abstract
The Structure of Overwhelm: Too Big Chunks
Classes & Categories # $
Parts # $
Retrievers Hounds %
Legs %
Tail
Beagles %
Paws %
Snoopy Claws The Structure of Nit-Picking: Chunking Down and Mismatching
Specific and concrete
Details
The Hierarchy of Ideas
Chunking Up
Agreement
"What is this an
Example of?"
"For What Purpose...?"
"What is your
intention...?"
"What does that get you?"
"What are examples of
this?"
"What specifically...?"
"What does that
mean?"
Distinctions
Chunking
Down
In mediation, chunk up to reach agreement. Keep chunking up until you reach the level of abstract concepts. You can match someone's chunk level and lead them to the level they need to get to (with an extreme 'General' or 'Specific' person this could take a while).
Existence
Life
Animals
Cats Dogs Llamas
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 372 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Representational Systems There are five sensory channels we use to represent our experience - visual, auditory (hearing), kinaesthetic (emotions, touch and bodily sensations), taste and smell. In addition, we can make sense of our experience in words.
All of our memories, imagination and current experience are made up of elements of these six ‘representational systems’. Most of us use one system more than the others. This shows up in the words that we use. These are often referred to as 'predicates' in the NLP jargon.
You can listen out for the dominant sensory words in what a person is saying and use words from the same representational system when you reply. If you use visual words to a ‘visual’ person, it’s easier for them to understand because they don’t have to translate from another system. This is another way to gain rapport, because you will sound more like the other person. Visual Auditory Kinaesthetic picture hear grasp clear clear handle sight music feel see rhythm rough light loud smooth focus in tune slippery perspective sound hurt vision overtone comfortable dark tell hold draw sing warm outlook quiet slap preview voice prickly paint tempo downhill sparkle unheard of rock flash harmony heavy snapshot rings a bell lift dawning counterpoint stuck shine rumble vibration colour rattle push diagram tone sink
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 373 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Sensory-Specific Phrases VISUAL AUDITORY KINAESTHETIC
An eyeful Afterthought All washed up
Appears to me Blabbermouth Boils down to
In her shadow Clear as a bell Chip off the old block
Bird’s eye view Clearly expressed Come to grips with
Catch a glimpse of Call on Control yourself
Clear cut Describe in detail Cool/calm
Dim view Earful Firm foundations
Draw me a diagram Give an account of Get a handle on
Get a perspective on Grant an audience Get a load of this
Get a scope on Heard voices Get in touch with
Hazy Idea Hidden message Get the drift of
Face up to Hold your tongue Hand in hand
In light of Idle talk Hang in there
In person Inquire into Heated argument
In view of Keynote speaker Hold it!
Looks like Loud and clear Hold on!
Make a scene Manner of speaking Hothead
Mental image Pay attention to Keep your hair on
Mental picture Power of speech Kick it into touch
Mind’s eye Purrs like a kitten Knock it on the head
Naked eye Rings a bell Know-how
Paint a picture State your purpose Lay cards on table
See to it Tattle-tale Pain-in the neck
Short sighted To tell the truth Pull some strings
Showing off Tongue-tied Sharp as a tack
Sight for sore eyes Tuned in/tuned out Slipped my mind
Staring off into space Unheard of Smooth operator
Take a peek Utterly Start from scratch
Tunnel vision Voiced an opinion Stiff upper lip
Under your nose Well informed Stuffed shirt
Up front Within hearing Too much of a hassle
Well defined Word for word Topsy-turvy
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 374 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Rep Systems Preference Test For each of the following statements, place a number next to every phrase. Use the following system to indicate your preferences: 4 = Closest to describing you 3 = Next best description 2 = Next best 1 = Least descriptive of you 1. I base my important decisions on: ___ gut feeling ___ the option that sounds best to me ___ which way looks best ___ objective assessment of issues 2. In discussions, I am most likely to be influenced by: ___ the tone of the other person's voice ___ if I can see their argument ___ the logic of their case ___ how sincere I feel they are 3. People can tell how I am by: ___ the way I look and the way I am dressed ___ the feelings I share ___ the words I use ___ how my voice sounds 4. I find it easiest to: ___ find the ideal volume and tuning on a stereo system ___ select the most intellectually relevant point about an interesting subject ___ choose the most comfortable furniture ___ select rich, attractive colour combinations 5. ___ I am very tuned in to sounds around me ___ I am very adept at making sense of new facts and data ___ I am very sensitive to the way clothing feel on my body ___ I have a strong response to colours and to the way a room looks This test is an adaptation of a test in Tad James' NLP Practitioner manual (1997). www.nlpcoaching.com
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 375 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Scoring Your Rep System Preferences Step One:
Copy your answers from the test to the lines below: 1. ___K 2. ___A 3. ___V 4. ___A 5. ___A
___A ___V ___K ___Ad ___Ad
___V ___Ad ___Ad ___K ___K
___Ad ___K ___A ___V ___V
Step Two:
Add the numbers associated with each letter. There will be five entries for each letter.
V K
A
Ad
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
TOTAL
Step Three:
The comparison of the totalled scores gives the relative preference for each of the representational systems. This represents only how you were processing when you took the test - so please don't start labelling yourself at the Identity level- "I'm a visual" or "I'm a kinaesthetic".
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 376 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Submodalities Submodalities are the qualities of each sensory modality. The submodalities in which a representation is coded tell you how important it is and what response to have - so if you change the submodality codings you can change the response.
Visual 1 2 3 4 Monochrome / Colour?
Near or Far?
Bright or Dim?
Location?
Size of Picture?
Focused / Defocused?
Framed or Panoramic?
Movie or Still?
Amount of Contrast
3D or Flat?
Associated/dissociated?
Auditory
Location
Direction
Internal or External?
Loud or Soft?
Fast or Slow?
High or Low? (Pitch)
Tonality
Pauses
Cadence
Duration
Kinaesthetic
Location
Size
Shape
Intensity
Steady
Movement/ Duration
Vibration
Pressure/Heat?
Weight
This is not an exclusive list - what other submodalities do you notice?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 377 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Basic Submodalities Change - “Mapping Across” E.G. COMPULSION INDIFFERENCE
This is useful for changing attitudes to things – for example, a food that the client "likes too much" (present state) can be shifted into the submodalities of a food that is disgusting to them (desired state).
1. Get into a resourceful state. 2. Establish rapport. 3. Identify the two states (or values/beliefs) that you want to
contrast — one desired, one undesired. 4. Elicit the submodalities of each separately. 5. “Contrastive Analysis”. Identify the Drivers - the critical
submodalities that make the difference between the two. (Usually it is good to go for the following as critical: location, distance, associated/dissociated, brightness, or focus.)
6. Let go of the content of the desired state, creating a void.
Change the submodalities of the present state to those of the desired state. Emphasise the drivers. You can leave the content of the present state as it is, although this may change by itself.
7. Test the change using the internal kinaesthetic experience (e.g.
"Does this feel like understanding now?" or "Do you want that food?") and future pace.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 378 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Submodality Belief Change Process Note - for each belief you elicit, ask the explorer to state what the belief is.
1. Think of a limiting belief about yourself that you wish you did
not have. What do you see as you think about it? (Elicit the submodalities)
2. Think of a belief that is no longer true. (e.g. Father Christmas,
or 'I go to [name of junior school]'. What do you see as you think about it? (Elicit the submodalities)
3. Change the submodalities of the limiting belief into the
submodalities of a belief that is no longer true.
TEST: Now, what do you think about that old belief?
4. Think of a belief which for you is absolutely true. Like, for
example, the belief that the sun is going to come up tomorrow. (Or, the belief that it’s good to breathe.) Do you believe it? (check for congruent belief) What do you see as you think about it? (Elicit the submodalities).
5. Think of a belief that you want to have, which is the opposite
of the old limiting belief. What do you see as you think about it? (Elicit the submodalities).
6. Change the submodalities of the desired belief into the
submodalities of the belief that is absolutely true.
TEST AND FUTURE PACE: Now, what do you believe? Why do you believe you have this new belief? What will happen next time you are in that situation where the limiting belief used
to affect you?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 379 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Key Success Factors In Submodality
Work:
1. Position yourself off to one side of the explorer, rather than directly in front of them, so that they have room to picture their representations and their eyes won't be fixed on you.
2. Elicit submodalities quickly:
“Is it big or small? Colour or black and white? rather than “Is it big?..... or small?”
If you pause or ask slowly, you cross the line between elicitation and installation because the explorer has time for each option in your question to influence their internal representation. This is especially true for visual submodalities.
3. The better you calibrate the non-verbal responses of the
explorer (e.g. where their eyes go when they picture their belief, changes in voice tone which show how certain they are about what they are saying) the easier and more successful the intervention will be.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 380 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Meta Model
PATTERNS EXAMPLES RESPONSES
DISTORTIONS
1. Mind Reading
"You don't like me" "He thinks I'm stupid" "He wants to humiliate me"
How do you know…?
2. Lost Performative (a value judgement
presented as a fact)
"She's beautiful" "It's selfish to go for what you want"
Who says?
By what standard do you judge…?
3. Cause-effect (A ! B)
"He makes me sad" "Work bores me"
How does this cause that?
4. Complex Equivalence (A = B or A means B))
"She's always yelling at me, she doesn't like me"
How does that mean…?
5. Presuppositions "Would you rather wash up or tidy your room first?"
Who says/how do you know….?
GENERALISATIONS 6. Universal Quantifiers (all, always, never,
everyone, no-one…or might be just implied)
"Everyone says so" "Things never go right for me" "Dogs are vicious"
Everyone? Has there ever been a time when…?
7. Modal Operators a) Necessity (must, should,
have to, need to…)
b) Possibility (can't, it's impossible…)
"I mustn't say that to him" "It is necessary to do this" "I can't stay now"
What would happen if you did? or (for Possibility only) "What stops you?"
DELETIONS 8. Nominalisations Processes that have
been turned into things
"I'm in a bad relationship" Who are you relating to? How are you relating badly?
9. Unspecified Verbs "Peter made things OK again" How (specifically)…?
10. Simple Deletions "I am unhappy" About what?
11. Unspecified Referential
Index
Where it's not clear what's being referred to
"They don't listen to me" "It's a matter of opinion" "Some people will never get this"
Who or what (specifically)…?
12. Comparative Deletions "It's better this way" "I handled that badly"
Compared with what?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 381 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Considerations For Using The Meta
Model
Use it as an inner guide for following what a person is saying to you and recognising the thought patterns that show up in their language, with the option to ask a question where that would be useful. The Meta Model is usually presented as a set of 'violations' and the 'challenges' to use on them. Aggressive questioning will come across as very confrontational. For example, it's best to avoid "how specifically" as it can tend to annoy people - particularly if they've run up against NLP practitioners in the past who are less adept than you. You have two purposes in using the Meta Model:
a) to recover lost information b) to help the client loosen up their model of the world
Ask the questions which are most relevant to these ends. Decide what level of information you are after. Go for the biggest chunk size you can while maintaining rapport. You can use the Meta Model to:
" Clarify your own thought processes and communication
" Check your understanding of what another person is saying
" Help other people to become aware of their own mental
maps, unconscious beliefs and thought processes
" Help them to solve problems by reconnecting their thoughts with sensory experience and identifying gaps in their thinking
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 382 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Anchoring Definition:
Any time a person is in an associated, intense state, and at the peak of that experience a specific stimulus is applied, then the two will be linked neurologically. Anchoring can assist you in gaining access to past states and linking the past state to the present and the future. The Four Steps to Anchoring:
1. Elicit a powerful desired state 2. Provide a specific stimulus at the peak (see chart below) 3. Change the person’s state 4. Set off the anchor to test.
The Four Keys to Anchoring:
! The Intensity of the Experience ! The Timing of the Anchor ! The Uniqueness of the Anchor ! The Replication of the Stimulus
Applying an Anchor:
Time
Intensity of state Apply
anchor here - as
state changes
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 383 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
The Circle Of Excellence
1. Identify an excellent state that you want to have more of.
2. Set up a 'circle of excellence' on the floor. What colour is it? How big?
3. Access the excellent state and associate it with the circle. a. What does it feel like when you are in that state? b. Remember a time when you were in that state. c. As soon as you start to feel that state, step into the
circle. d. Fully access the state.
4. Step back out of the circle and break state.
5. Test by stepping back into the circle. The excellent state should return.
6. Think of a future situation (dissociated) where it would be useful to have that excellent state.
7. Chaining a. What will let you know it's time to have these resources
available? b. Step into the circle as soon as you start to access the
"problem" state again. c. Notice what happens – the problem state should only
appear briefly and lead directly to the excellent state.
8. Note: you can stack more than one resource state in the circle if necessary.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 384 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Frames How we frame events or actions - the contexts against which we set them - will determine what they mean to us. Here are some frames commonly referred to in NLP:
The Outcome Frame
This about evaluating events in the light of the outcomes you have set. These outcomes should of course be well-formed. The Outcome Frame gives you a firm basis to evaluate each event. Essential questions: What is your desired outcome? (or just “What do you want?”) Does this event help you to achieve your desired outcome or take you further from it?
The Ecology Frame
This is about the effect of changes on the wider systems of which you are a part. If you feel incongruent about a proposed action, this is usually a sign that you need to pay attention to ecology. Essential questions: What is the effect of this event or action on the larger systems of which we are a part: family, team, organisation, community, or the planet as a whole? Does it respect your integrity as a human being, and the integrity of others involved?
The 'As If' Frame
This frame is about what would happen if some element of the situation were different. It is a way of exploring possibilities for creative problem solving. "What would Richard Bandler do in this situation?" "Where will we be six months from now, and how did we get here?" "What's the worst thing that could happen, and how would we handle it?" The Contrast Frame is the basis of contingency planning, computer systems testing, and science fiction.
Essential question: What would happen if...?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 385 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
The Backtrack Frame
In the backtrack frame, you recapitulate what has been said using the other person's key words and tonalities. This checks agreement and understanding of what has been said, helps to build rapport, and is useful to welcome new people to a meeting. It is also very useful to backtrack to the last point of agreement when a meeting gets stuck.
The Contrast Frame
This contrasts a desired outcome, an internal representation, or a proposed course of action to one or more alternatives - a desired outcome contrasted with the current situation, a proposed action with an alternative action or with doing nothing, and so on. You can use this to create choices, get more specific about details of representations, and gain perspective to make better decisions. Essential question: What are the differences between this and that?
The Appreciative Frame
Not one of the ‘standard’ NLP frames, but still useful. The Appreciative Frame explores what is working and what there is to be grateful for in the current situation, and what has been achieved in the past. The Appreciative Frame has several benefits: research shows that people who keep a ‘gratitude journal’ experience better physical and emotional states, and are more likely to achieve their goals. Examining what is already working well in your life also means that any goals or visions for the future that you construct are easier to imagine and more credible, because they are rooted in existing reference experiences. Essential questions: What is already working well? What are you proud of? What have you already achieved? What are you grateful for?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 386 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
The Agreement Frame Everyone sees things from a different point of view. Expressing a different point of view can easily escalate into conflict if not carefully managed, especially if the other person's opinions have a lot of emotion attached to them. Usually when people disagree with someone, they use the word "but" to preface their own viewpoint. "But" has the effect of negating or erasing the internal representation of what that has been said before it. Not surprisingly, people don't care for having their "truth" blotted out. They may feel disregarded, disrespected and angry. If you want to express your viewpoint while acknowledging another person's right to hold a different view, you can use the "agreement frame" which uses "and" in place of "but". 1. "I agree": If you actually agree with the other person's point, but want to add a different perspective:
"I agree with you, and have you considered that it could also appear like this..." 2. "I respect": if want to show that you find something to respect in what the other person has said, despite disagreeing with it (e.g. the positive intention behind what they have said): "I respect your honesty in saying that, and you may want to be aware of this different viewpoint...." 3. "I appreciate": if you can't find anything to agree with or even respect, you can at least acknowledge the other person's opinion:
"I appreciate the depth of your convictions about this, and I know you will respect other people's right to a different view..."
What not to say:
"I understand..." – this can sound patronising. Note the different internal representations of "but" and "and":
"X but Y"
"X and Y"
X
Y X Y
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 387 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
One-Word Reframing (“Emotive Conjugation”) Look at these well-known quotations from Bertrand Russell:
“I am firm, you are obstinate, he is a pig-headed fool.”
“I am righteously indignant, you are annoyed, he is making a fuss over nothing.”
“I have reconsidered the matter, you have changed your mind, he has gone back on his word.”
(from The Brains Trust on BBC Radio in 1948 - see http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Emotive_conjugation)
Russell was illustrating how words can have a similar denotation (meaning) but quite different positive or negative connotations (the fuller set of associations and emotions that are attached to the word). NB ‘denotation’ and ‘connotation’ are drawn from semiotics and are not commonly used terms in NLP, although they are useful nevertheless. The structure Russell used - “I am x, you are y, he/she is z” - is also known as ‘emotive conjugation’ or ‘the Russell conjugation’. In each case the different terms used for “I, you and he” refer to the same behaviour or quality, but frame them differently so that we feel differently about them. Russell was using this structure to highlight our tendency to judge other people’s behaviour more harshly than our own, but we can equally use the same structure to put a more positive spin on negative self-judgements, to reduce the perceived size of obstacles or transgressions, or to make a goal more motivating. To generate one-word reframes, think of the connotations as a continuum, decide which direction you want to go (e.g from ‘good’ to ‘great’, or ‘distracting’ to ‘creative’), and pick words at different points along the continuum. e.g. Always late -> often tardy, sometimes delayed Overwhelming -> difficult, not easy Good -> outstanding, spectacular More examples of ‘emotive conjugation’ here:
http://worddaze.blogspot.com/2006/05/may-18-denotations-and-connotations.html
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 388 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Constructing a Metaphor You can use metaphors to pace and lead the client’s unconscious mind. A metaphor is a story which is analogous to the client’s experience. The events, things and characters in the story are “isomorphic” (equivalent, literally “the same shape”) with the events, things and characters in the client’s experience. The metaphor goes beyond the client’s current (problem) situation to suggest resources and ways of resolving the situation which the client may have overlooked. Because the resources and solutions are described symbolically, the client’s unconscious has to choose its own internal resources and resolution process to make sense of the story. The metaphor does not tell the client what to do, it creates positive internal representations and invites the client to find a solution. 1. Get in a resourceful state.
2. Establish rapport.
3. Specify desired outcome (using the Meta Model).
4. Open up the client’s model of the world. Discover the client’s strategy for having the problem Identify the elements (parts, people, things) that are involved in the problem
5. Design a metaphor.
Chunk up one level by asking yourself “What is this an example of?” Chunk down again to another situation which is an example of the same thing, and devise a story to help the client’s unconscious mind locate resources.
Establish "isomorphism" for all significant nouns (things/people) and verbs (actions/processes) - i.e. find elements in the story which match the elements in the client’s situation.
Find new resources or ways of resolving the dilemma of the story, so the story goes beyond the problem stage to a successful conclusion.
6. Tell the story
Include positive internal representations and embedded suggestions in your wording.
You may want to add anchors - e.g. you could anchor one side of a dilemma to one of your hands, the other side to the other hand, and bring them together when describing a solution that integrates both.
Leave the person to find their own meanings. This ensures ecology has been built into the process.
Metaphors don’t have to be longwinded - as little as one word in the right place may evoke a symbol with a wealth of meaning attached.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 389 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
“Neuro-Logical Levels of Change”
Level Information SPIRIT
(PURPOSE)
What am I here for? What am I part of that is greater than myself?
IDENTITY
Who am I?
VALUES AND
BELIEFS
What is important to me? What do I expect (in a given situation)?
CAPABILITIES What do I know how to do? What skills do I have?
BEHAVIOUR What am I doing?
ENVIRONMENT Where am I?
One possible use of the pattern:
Problems & SPIRIT % Resources
& IDENTITY %
& VALUES + BELIEFS %
& CAPABILITIES %
& BEHAVIOUR %
& ENVIRONMENT %
Ask which side the client prefers to have the resources - and stand on that side!
Note: Neuro-logical levels pattern developed by Robert Dilts
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 390 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Neuro-Logical Levels Of Teams
It can be useful to consider teams and organisations in terms of Robert Dilts' "Neuro-Logical Levels" model. Each level should support those above it – if the team's behaviour contradicts the stated mission, which one are team members and customers going to believe?
Purpose
What greater purpose (end goal) does the team or organisation contribute to?
What larger systems is it part of and how does it contribute to them?
Identity & Mission
What is the identity of the team or organisation, and how strong is it?
How unified is it?
What is its stated/unstated mission?
Values & Beliefs
What stated/unstated values/norms does the team organisation subscribe to?
What stated/unstated assumptions does it operate from in practice?
What mechanisms allow these assumptions to be updated by experience?
Capabilities
What skills are needed to fulfil the mission and stated values of the team?
What skills needs does it have?
What skills do its members have that the team is not yet tapping into?
How does the team learn?
Behaviour
How closely do the actions of the team reflect its values and mission in practice:
- within the team
- outside the team, to customers, suppliers, other parts of the organisation?
What should it do more/less of?
Environment
How well does the physical environment of the team enable it to fulfil its mission?
What resource needs does it have?
What external constraints does it face?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 391 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
The “Disney Strategy” For Creativity 1. Select the problem you are going to deal with. Select three places to
stand: one for the “Dreamer”, one for “Realist” and one for the “Critic”. 2. Think of a time when you were really creative. Step into the Dreamer
space and relive that time. You might want to look up to Visual Constructed. Form a visual construction (dissociated) of the most attractive compelling possibilities. At this point there are no stupid ideas - everything is valuable. Thank your unconscious mind for its creativity.
3. Break state and step into the “Realist” space. Remember a time when you
put a plan into action in an elegant and effective way; when you were going to do it no matter what and determined to find the best ways to make it work. Be associated in the dream - what do you need to do to make it work? What would you do if you knew you couldn’t fail? What resources would you need? Where would you make it happen? Gather all the necessary information.
4. Break state and step into the “Critic” space. Look for flaws, things that
could go wrong, things you might have missed. Nitpicking is OK at this stage. Offer suggestions for improvement.
5. Break state and go back to the Dreamer space, incorporating your
learnings from the other two positions. Recycle through the positions until the outcome is accepted in all of them.
6. If other people are involved in the dream, discover how it is for them by
stepping into their shoes. If there is anything uncomfortable for them, recycle through the stages and continue to refine the dream until it works for everyone.
7. Associate and future pace. Step into the attractive, compelling possibility
and experience it fully as if it is actually happening. Step back out of it, (optionally put it in your future timeline), and make it happen!
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 392 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
The S.C.O.R.E. Model Origins
Robert Dilts states in the Encyclopedia of Systemic NLP and NLP New Coding that the S.C.O.R.E. model originated in 1987 when he and the late Todd Epstein noticed that they were intuitively using a more effective method than their advanced NLP students for mapping out problems and designing interventions to get to solutions. As they examined their own problem-solving process to find how it differed from that of their students, they found that they were viewing any problem situation as having these five components: Symptoms – these are the immediate signs that tell you there is a
problem
Causes – which may be the antecedent conditions that gave rise to the symptoms, the intentions behind behaviours giving rise to the problem, or current constraints
Outcome – your desired result or goal, where you want to get to
Resources – the qualities, capabilities, reserves and help that you can bring to bear on solving the problem. These can be past, present or future.
Effects – the longer term, systemic and higher level results of the outcome
You can arrange these elements on a time line like this:
Causes
Effects
Symptoms
Outcomes
Resources
Past Present Future
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 393 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Sample questions to clarify each
component
Symptoms:
• What's not working?
• What do you want to change?
Causes:
• What are the underlying causes?
• What's stopping you from fixing this?
• Who or what is benefiting from not fixing this?
Outcomes:
• What do you want instead of the problem?
• Where do you want to get to?
Effects:
• What will it do for you/your team/your organisation/society for you to attain your goal?
• How will reaching your outcome change things?
• What will you learn from it?
Resources
• What skills/personal qualities/money/equipment/contacts do you have that will help you to solve your problem?
• Have you faced a problem like this before? How did you solve it?
Generally you would start with the Symptoms. After that you can go in any direction. There is no set order or prescribed length of time to be spent in each component - let your interest and intuition, and your calibration of the client, guide you as to when to move to another component, and which one to move to. Further study: "S.C.O.R.E. Model" in The Encyclopedia of Systemic NLP by Robert Dilts and Judith Delozier - online at www.nlpuniversitypress.com
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 394 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Using the S.C.O.R.E. in practice - with
individuals
To really get the best from the S.C.O.R.E. it needs to be more than a cerebral paper-and-pen exercise. Instead, lay the timeline on the floor and mark out Causes, Symptoms, Outcomes and Effects as spaces along it. Resources should be somewhere off the timeline. The model will have more impact if the explorer physically steps into each location as they investigate it. This helps to physically associate the person into the state and frame of mind of each component of the model, making it easier to access all the information at each stage. By walking through the sequence from Causes, through Symptoms and Outcomes to Effects, the explorer will begin to condition in a metaphorical sequence of moving from 'problem' to 'solution'. They can step off the timeline and gather what they need from the Resource location any time it feels right. The 'Dancing S.C.O.R.E. Format' developed by Judith DeLozier takes this principle even deeper into the kinaesthetic realm, inviting the client to adopt the posture and movement that feels characteristic of each stage. By moving repeatedly through the sequence of postures from problem to solution, the client begins to internalise the direction of change 'in the muscle'. A skilled NLP practitioner will be able to make the process more effective by anchoring the 'positive' stages (Resources, Outcomes and Effects) as appropriate. You could also use embedded suggestion and hypnotic tonality in your questions to help the client associate more fully into these stages.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 395 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Using the S.C.O.R.E. in practice - with
teams
If a management team wants to assess where they are now, and where they want to get to - or indeed if they want to draw a line under past failures and set some new objectives - the S.C.O.R.E. model provides a ready-made format. It's best done with an independent facilitator who can guide the process without having an emotional stake in the content. In my experience, most managers are not interested in the intricacies of NLP, but just want something that helps them to move forward. The S.C.O.R.E. model is well suited to the task because it is relatively jargon-free. You don't even have to make the concept of a timeline explicit - just arrange four flip charts in a line to represent Causes, Symptoms, Outcomes and Effects, with another flip off to one side for Resources, and you have an implicit timeline. As the team members move from one flip to another to record the information they get from each stage, they will unconsciously internalise the idea of progress along a timeline even if it's never explicitly mentioned (this tip comes f from NLP business consultant Colin Reeve www.raconsultancy.com). This being the UK, how do you prevent a team problem-solving format that starts with examining 'symptoms' from turning into a morale-sapping whinge fest? Your introduction will set the tone for the rest of the session, so emphasise the desired end result of clarifying the desired outcome and identifying the positive consequences. The more you know about the values of the team, the more you can encourage their 'towards' motivation. If it's a particularly 'away from' team, you can emphasise the consequences of not focusing on the desired outcomes and effects. You can encourage a positive mindset before the session even starts, by asking participants in their invitation to come in with examples of what is already working well in the organisation or team.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 396 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
The ‘Satir Categories’ Renowned family therapist Virginia Satir noticed that people to fall into four recognisable ways of communicating and body posture when they are under stress. The "Leveller" was added later. 1. The Placater Automatic response is to believe that everything is his or her
fault. The Placater is always trying to please others and always apologising.
Defining posture: symmetrical open physiology, looking up at you, arms outstretched, palms upward and moving up
Language: qualifiers - only, even, just, a little; could, would; “I don’t know”
2. The Blamer
Loud, tyrannical, finger-pointing - it’s always someone else’s fault. Harsh, shouting voice. Feels lonely inside.
Defining posture: In your face, leaning forward, pointing the finger at you
Language: universals - all, every, never; negative questions - “Why can’t you ever listen?”; C!E violations - “You’re always making me angry”
3. The Computer
Dry, cool, super-reasonable, takes a detached view of everything. Stands rigidly, as if cut off from everything happening below the neck. The body is just a means to convey the brain from place to place. Often stands back with his arms folded or one hand raised to his chin. Can rationalise anything, retreating into abstractions to escape his feelings. Intellect is important to the Computer; feelings are not to be trusted.
Defining posture: rigid, leaning backwards
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 397 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Language: Abstract words, passive voice, nominalisations; "There was an agreement” rather than “we agreed”
4. The Distracter
Always changing the subject, never answering a question directly, the Distracter feels ignored and will interrupt constantly to be noticed. Often has a repertoire of accents and funny voices - anything to avoid being serious or grown-up.
Defining posture: angular, always moving, lopsided.
Identifying language: anything, as long as it’s not relevant; "I don't know", "It's not my fault. Can cycle through elements of the other four categories.
5. The Leveller
Congruent, calm, solid, confident, authoritative.
Defining posture: symmetrical, upright, centred, hands moving downward, palms down and spreading.
Identifying language: "this is the way it is", "this is true".
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 398 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Values What are values?
• Values are abstract concepts
• Values are what is important to us - they motivate us
• They are also our criteria for determining whether our actions are “right” or “wrong”
• They determine how we spend our time
• They may be different in different contexts
• They are related to beliefs and each other
• They are in a hierarchy - some are more important than others. 1. Discovering Values for a given context
“What’s important about.......?” Keep going until you get an abstract value: “What’s important about <answer>?” “What else is important?” and when they run out of answers ask:
“What else is important?” to get the values they are less consciously aware of (often among the most important)
2. Prioritising Values
“If you could only have one of these values, which one would you have?” “And if you could have one more, which one would you have?” Rewrite the list of values in the order of importance - you may find that some of the values in the list are the same and have merged.
3. Towards/Away From Motivation
“Why is <value> important to you?” The answer may come in terms of what you want (“because I love it”) or in terms of what you don’t want (“because if I don’t have it, it will be terrible”). Watch out for ‘concealed away froms’ which come out as comparisons (“it’s better to have money” – better than what?) or as “should’s”, “ought to’s”, “musts” etc.
4. Check For Clashes
For each value, check that it 'goes with' each other value. They don't have to actively support each other, as long as they can coexist peacefully.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 399 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
POWERful Goals P - Positive
Always set goals in the positive sense. That is, what do you want, rather than what you don't want.
O - Own it "What can you do to bring this about by your own actions?" "What can you do to influence the outcome?" "What do you need to do to achieve this goal?"
W – What and When
(a) "What date do you intend to have this outcome by?"
(b) "Put yourself in the situation of having it. What do you see/hear/feel when you have it?" Make sure that your image of the goal is sensory-rich, vivid and compelling.
E – "Ecology" (Effects on every area of your life)
This is a 'risk assessment' on how the goal will affect every area of your life. (a) "What will happen when you have it?"
"What won't happen when you have it?" "Are there any downsides to achieving it?"
(b) "How would having this outcome affect each area of your life?" "Who else would be affected by you having this outcome?" "How would you having this outcome affect the planet?" (c) Congruence check:
"How do you feel about this goal?" "Do you want it 100%?"
"Does your energy increase when you think about it?" If not, adjust the goal until you feel enthusiastic about it!
R – Resources and Route
What resources do you have that will help you reach your goal? What additional resources do you need?
It's much easier to work out how to get to your goal once you've got there!
Put yourself in the position of having achieved the goal. What had to be in place immediately before to allow your goal to happen? And what had to be in place before that? And so on – all the way back to the very first step.
The POWER conditions for a well-formed outcome are adapted from a model by Jenny Flintoft of Rock Solutions (www.rock-solutions.com) Used by permission.
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 400 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Walking A Goal Into Your Future Timeline 1. Lay your timeline on the floor and step onto ‘now’, facing the future.
2. Determine where in the future you want to have achieved your goal and establish where that is on the timeline.
3. Ensure that your representation of the goal is clear and has energy.
4. Carrying your goal walk towards the future and stop just before the appropriate point in your timeline.
5. Let the goal float down onto your timeline.
6. Step into the achieved goal and feel the experience of achieving it. Experience through all the senses (Visual, Kinaesthetic, Auditory, Taste and Smells).
7. Turn up the intensity.
8. Step beyond your goal and look back towards now.
• What plans did you need to develop?
• What skills did you need to develop?
• What were all the things you needed to do?
• Whose help did you need to call on?
• Who did you look to model?
9. What advice would you give to the 'you' back at now?
10. Close your eyes and walk back to now, as you do that notice the events lining up to support you in achieving your goal.
11. Stand at now, take a few moments to reflect on how you feel about achieving that goal now.
WHAT IS THE FIRST STEP YOU NEED TO TAKE RIGHT NOW?
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 401 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Wall Charts
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 402 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Present State And Desired State
Present
State
Desired
State
Resources
Thoughts Feelings Physiology
Ecology Frame
Thoughts Feelings Physiology
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 403 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
The Map Is Not The Territory
Your internal filters introduce:
• Deletions (we pay attention to what we are interested in)
• Distortions (we look for patterns and connections)
• Generalisations (we look for commonality and predictability)
F
I
L
T
E
R
S
INTERNAL
REPRESENTATION
STATE
Physiological
Emotional
Mental
Spiritual
BEHAVIOUR
RESULTS
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 404 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Big Picture Abstract
The Structure of Overwhelm: Too Big Chunks
Classes & Categories # $
Parts # $
Retrievers Hounds %
Legs %
Tail
Beagles %
Paws %
Snoopy Claws
The Structure of Nit-Picking: Chunking Down and Mismatching
Specific and concrete
Details
The Hierarchy of Ideas
Chunking Up
Agreement
"What is this an
Example of?"
"For What Purpose...?"
"What is your
intention...?"
"What does that
get you?"
"What are examples of this?"
"What
specifically...?"
"What does that
mean?"
Distinctions
Chunking
Down
Existence
Life
Animals
Cats Dogs Llamas
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 405 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Alphabet Edit
A B C D E R
L T L L
F G H I J R
T T R L
K L M N O T
L R L R
P Q R S T T
L T R R
U V W X Y L
T R T L
Z
R
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 406 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Compass for a Well-Formed Outcome
Full representation of the outcome
Context for the
outcome
Resources
What you will lose when you achieve
the outcome
Positively stated
outcome
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 407 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Index of Applications
Use this index to find exercises for a particular course or
workshop.
-Behaviour Change.......................................................................42, 44, 48
-Bodywork....................................................................................................98
-Brainstorming............................................................................................61
-Coaching Skills 58, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 91, 93, 101, 103, 112, 114,
118, 120, 122, 125, 128, 129, 131, 136, 138, 140, 143, 148, 153,
156, 189, 192, 205, 209, 239, 240, 265, 282, 286, 293, 298, 301
-Confidence 44, 48, 53, 56, 79, 81, 83, 85, 88, 187, 189, 194, 197,
199, 205, 207, 212, 224, 331
-Counselling Skills 58, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 91, 93, 101, 103, 106,
112, 114, 118, 120, 122, 125, 128, 129, 131, 136, 138, 140, 143,
205, 239, 265
-Creativity .................................................................................61, 109, 305
-Customer Service 101, 103, 114, 116, 118, 120, 122, 128, 136,
138, 143, 267, 269
-Dealing With Difficult People...................79, 81, 175, 267, 269, 296
-Decision Making.............85, 131, 240, 273, 275, 280, 282, 298, 305
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 408 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
-Emotional Intelligence 91, 93, 101, 103, 112, 114, 118, 120, 122,
173, 175, 205, 260, 263, 265, 273, 275, 307
-Goal Setting..........................59, 83, 85, 180, 192, 218, 240, 280, 282
-Group dynamics........................................................................................40
-Hypnosis ...........................................................................53, 56, 166, 303
-Inclusion .....................................................................................................40
-Influencing 91, 93, 101, 103, 106, 114, 116, 118, 120, 122, 125,
128, 129, 136, 138, 140, 143, 145, 148, 153, 156
-Interpersonal Skills 91, 93, 101, 103, 114, 116, 118, 120, 122,
125, 128, 129, 136, 138, 143, 175, 260, 307
-Introduction to NLP 40, 42, 44, 48, 58, 59, 64, 65, 68, 70, 72, 74,
79, 81, 91, 93, 95, 98, 101, 103, 106, 109, 114, 116, 118, 120,
122, 125, 128, 129, 148, 153, 156, 175, 180, 187, 189, 192, 194,
205, 207, 209, 212, 222
-Leadership...............................................................................................209
-Listening Skills .......................................................72, 74, 114, 120, 131
-Management..............................................116, 131, 205, 267, 269, 280
-Motivation ............................................83, 85, 180, 192, 218, 240, 282
-Negotiation..............................................................................................143
-Presentation Skills.................................53, 56, 79, 145, 209, 296, 323
-Problem Solving .....................................................................61, 293, 305
-Relaxation............................................................................................53, 56
-Sales 91, 93, 101, 103, 114, 116, 118, 120, 122, 128, 129, 136,
138, 143, 148, 153, 156
-Self-Esteem 44, 48, 79, 81, 83, 85, 88, 187, 189, 197, 199, 205,
207, 212, 272, 331
-Spiritual Development..............83, 85, 112, 125, 143, 267, 269, 286
-Storytelling..............................................................................................163
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 409 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
-Stress Management 44, 48, 53, 56, 79, 81, 83, 85, 88, 180, 189,
192, 194, 197, 199, 205, 207, 212, 218, 222, 224, 232, 267, 269,
273, 275, 331, 345
-Team-Building ...................................................114, 116, 143, 288, 293
-Therapy Skills 58, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 79, 81, 91, 93, 101, 103,
106, 112, 114, 118, 120, 122, 125, 128, 129, 131, 136, 138, 140,
143, 145, 148, 153, 156, 180, 187, 189, 192, 194, 197, 199, 205,
207, 209, 224, 239, 265, 298, 301
-Time Management........................................................................227, 232
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 410 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
About The Author
Andy Smith is an ANLP-accredited NLP trainer, Appreciative Inquiry facilitator, and Emotional Intelligence Coach based in Manchester, UK and Limousin, France. Andy was a badly-trained hypnotherapist before he trained as an NLP Practitioner in 1995. He started running one and two-day NLP-based workshops for stress management, self-esteem and goal-setting, and trained as an NLP Trainer with Advanced Neuro Dynamics in 1997. Andy is a serial NLP group founder, starting the Richmond NLP Group in 1996 with Nick Driscoll, the Manchester NLP Group in 2001, and the Manchester Business NLP and Emotional Intelligence Group in 2005. Organising these groups, along with attending NLP conferences and courses with trainers like John Grinder, Charles Faulkner, Eric Robbie, Joseph O’Connor, John Seymour, Ian McDermott, Sue Knight, Leo Angart, David Gordon, Jonathan Altfeld, Doug O’Brien, John Overdurf and Julie Silverthorn, has given him the opportunity to experience hundreds of NLP trainers and presenters. Andy has been running NLP Practitioner trainings since 2000. Visit these websites for more information and tips:
NLP, Coaching and Emotional Intelligence (website and blog): www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Manchester Business NLP and Emotional Intelligence Group: www.manchesternlp.co.uk
Goal-setting and personal development: www.createthelifeyouwant.co.uk
Appreciative Inquiry and employee engagement: www.positive-engagement.co.uk
Follow Andy on Twitter: @practicaleq Contact: [email protected]
Tel: +44 7967 591 313
The Trainer’s Book of NLP Exercises © 2010 Andy Smith
- 411 - www.coachingleaders.co.uk
Products by Andy Smith
Achieve Your Goals: Strategies To Transform Your Life (Dorling Kindersley 2006) “Well done Andy - this is a superb book. It is simply the most comprehensive book I have read on goals” - David Molden, NLP trainer and author
Achieve Your Goals hypnotic audio “Since using Andy Smith's audio, "Achieve Your Goals" I've dropped over 40 lbs of fat and put on 10 lbs of muscle... I recommend it unreservedly” - MTD, Milwaukee
55 Ways To Increase Your Emotional Intelligence tips booklet “The neatest and most practical book I have seen for the busy reader - and that is said having written several EI books of my own!” - Jill Dann, Emotional Intelligence consultant and author
The Open Course Profit Calculator Do you know exactly how many participants you need before your open courses move into profit, or how changing the price or moving to a different venue would affect your revenues? With this tool for trainers, you can find out instantly!
More products at coachingleaders.1st4webshops.com/catalog/
Want to license this book for your students, or become an affiliate for our products? Contact me at [email protected]